STP Mathematics 1A Text

ST(P) Mathematics lA
Dvr 4
A Sheph^r
E Smith
ST(P) MATHEMATICS lA
ST(P) MATHEMATICS series:
ST(P) 1A
ST(P) IB
ST(P) 1A Teacher's Notes and Answers
ST(P) IB Teacher's Notes and Answers
ST(P) 2A
ST(P) 2B
ST(P) 2B Teacher's Notes and Answers
ST(P) 3A
ST(P) 3B
ST(P) 4A
ST(P) 4B
ST(P) 5A (with answers)

ST(P) 5B (with answers)
ST(P) 5C
ST(P) 5C Copy Masters
ST(P) 5C Teacher's Notes and Answers
ST(P) Resource Book

ST(P)
MATHEMATICS
L. Bostock, B.sc.
S. Chandler, b.sc.
A. Shepherd, b.sc.
E. Smith, M.sc.
Stanley Thornes (Publishers) Ltd

Text © L Bostock, S. Chandler, A. Shepherd and E. Smith 1984, 1991
Original illustrations © Nelson Thornes Ltd 1984, 1991
The right of L. Bostock, S. Chandler, A. Shepherd and E. Smith to be identified as

authors of this work have been asserted by them in accordance with the Copyright,
Designs and Patents Act 1988.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in

any fPrm or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy,
recording or any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in
writing from the publisher or under licence from the Copyright Licensing Agency
Limited, of 90 Tottenham Court Road, London WIT 4LP.
Any person who commits any unauthorised act in relation to this publication may
be iiable to criminal prosecution and civil claims for damages.
First published in 1984 by:

Staniey Thornes (Publishers) Ltd
Second edition 1991
Reprinted in 2002 by:

Nelson Thornes Ltd
Delta Place
27 Bath Road
CHELTENHAM
GL53 7TH
United Kingdom
05 / 30 29 28 27 26 25
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
ISBN 0 7487 0540 6
Page make-up by Cotswold Typesetting Ltd
Printed and bound in Spain by GraphyCems

CONTENTS
Introduction viii
Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction of Whole Numbers 1

Addition of whole numbers. Subtraction of whole numbers. Mixed
addition and subtraction. Approximation to the nearest 10, 100,. . .
Obtaining approximate answers. Using calculators.
Chapter 2 Multiplication and Division of Whole Numbers 12

Multiplication by 10, 100,. . . Long multiplication. Using a calculator
for long multiplication. Short division. Long division. Mixed operations
of +, —, X, -f-. Using brackets. Number patterns. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 3 Fractions: Addition and Subtraction 32

The meaning of fractions. One quantity as a fraction of another.
Equivalent fractions. Simplifying fractions. Adding fractions. Subtracting
fractions. Mixed addition and subtraction. Mixed numbers and
improper fractions. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 4 Fractions: Multiplication and Division 59

Multiplying fractions. Multiplying mixed numbers. Fractions of
quantities. Dividing by fractions. Mixed multiplication and division.
Mixed operations. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 5 Introduction to Decimals 76

The meaning of decimals. Changing decimals to fractions. Addition of
decimals. Subtraction of decimals. Multiplication by 10, 100. . .
Division by 10, 100 . . . Division by whole numbers. Changing fractions
to decimals (exact values). Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 6 Multiplication and Division of Decimals 93

Multiplication. Recurring decimals. Correcting to a given number of
decimal places. Changing fractions to decimals. Division by decimals.
Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 7 Metric Units 108

Units of length. Changing from large units to smaller units. Units of
weight. Mixed units. Changing from small units to larger units. Adding
and subtracting metric quantities. Multiplying metric units. Money
units. Mixed Exercises.
V
Chapter 8 Imperial Units 121
Units of length. Units of weight. Rough equivalence between metric and
imperial units.
Chapter 9 Introducing Geometry 125

Fractions of a revolution. Right angles. Acute, obtuse and reflex angles.
Degrees. Using a protractor to measure angles. Estimating the size of
an angle. Drawing angles using a protractor. Vertically opposite angles.
Angles on a straight line. Supplementary angles. Angles at a point.
Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 10 Symmetry 148

One axis of symmetry. Two axes of symmetry. Three or more axes of
symmetry. Rotational symmetry. Congruence. Three-dimensional
symmetry.
Chapter 11 Triangles and Angles 159

Using a pair of compasses. Drawing a straight line. Triangles. The sum
of the angles of a triangle. Constructing triangles. The sum of the angles
of a quadrilateral. Equilateral and isosceles triangles. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 12 Factors and Indices 181

Factors. Multiples. Prime numbers. Indices (positive integers). Finding
prime factors. Expressing a number in prime factors. Highest common
factor (HCF). Lowest common multiple (LCM).
Chapter 13 Tables and Networks 188

Two-way tables. Road networks and maps. Route networks. Drawing
networks. Networks showing relationships.
Chapter 14 Area 202

Counting squares. Units of area. Area of a square. Area of a rectangle.
Compound figures. Perimeter. Changing units of area. Mixed Problems.
Chapter 15 Parallel Lines and Angles 217

Parallel lines. Corresponding angles. Drawing parallel lines using a
protractor. Alternate angles. Interior angles.
Chapter 16 Coordinates 236

Plotting points using coordinates. Properties of the special
quadrilaterals. Negative coordinates. Straight lines. Curves.
VI
Chapter 17 Directed Numbers 253
Use of positive and negative numbers. Extending the number line.
Addition and subtraction of positive numbers. Addition and subtraction
of negative numbers. Multiplication of directed numbers. Division of
negative numbers. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 18 Introducing Algebra 264

The idea of equations. Solving equations (one operation). Multiples
of X. Forming and solving equations from problems. Equations with
letter terms on both sides. Solving equations (two operations).
Simplifying expressions. Collecting like terms. Equations containing like
terms. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 19 Volume 279

Cubic units. Volume of a cuboid. Changing units of volume. Capacity.
Mixed units. Drawing cuboids. Making cuboids.
Chapter 20 Vectors 294

Representing vectors. Capital letter notation. Equal vectors, parallel
vectors and negative vectors. Addition of vectors. Subtraction of vectors.
Chapter 21 More Algebra 309

Brackets. Multiplication of directed numbers. Equations containing
brackets. Indices (positive integers). Multiplication and division of
algebraic fractions. Mixed Exercises.
Chapter 22 Statistics 322

Collecting information. Frequency tables. Bar charts. Grouping
information. Pie charts. Pictographs. Mean and range.
Chapter 23 Decision Trees 343

Decision trees.
vii
INTRODUCTION
To the pupil:
This book attempts to satisfy your mathematical needs as you

continue to work through the National Curriculum in the first year of
secondary school. We are very conscious of the need for success and of
the enjoyment everyone finds in getting things right. With this in mind
we have divided most of the exercises into three types of question:
The first type, identified by plain numbers, e.g. 12., helps you to see
if you understand the work. These questions are considered
necessary for every chapter you attempt.
The second type, identified by a single underline, e.g. 12., are extra,
but not harder, questions for quicker workers, for extra practice or
for later revision.
The third type, identified by a double underline, e.g. 12., are for
those of you who manage Type 1 questions fairly “easily and
therefore need to attempt questions that are a little harder.
Most chapters end with “mixed exercises”. These will help you revise
what you have done, either when you have finished the chapter or at a
later date.
All of you need to be able to use a calculator accurately. At this stage

it is wise not to rely on a calculator for work that can be done
mentally and to use it mainly to check your answers. Whether you use
a calculator or do the working yourself, always estimate your answer
and always ask yourself the question, “Is my answer a sensible one?”
To the teacher:
A number of topics have been introduced as a result of the National

Curriculum. Originally featured in the Supplementary Booklet, they
have now been incorporated in this new edition. One chapter, Sets,
has been removed.
The A series of ST(P) Mathematics books aims to prepare pupils to

achieve about Level 7/8 at Key stage 3 and the highest level at GCSE.
This book covers most attainment targets at Levels 4 and 5, about
half at Level 6 and some at Level 7. A few topics go beyond Level 7;
this offers flexibility for those teachers who prefer to start the work at
this stage, but they can be omitted.
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION
OF WHOLE NUIVIBERS
We use whole numbers all the time in everyday life and it is important that
we should be able to add them and subtract them accurately in our heads.
This comes with practice.
CONTINUOUS ADDITION
To add a line of numbers, start at the left-hand side:

Working in your head
6-|-4-t-3 + 8 = 21 add the first two numbers (10)
then add on the next number (13)
then add on the next number (21).
Check your answer by starting at the other end.
To add a column of numbers, start at the bottom and working in your head
add up the column:
8
7
2
-F5 (5-f2 = 7, 7-f7 = 14, 14 + 8 = 22)
22
Check your answer by starting at the top and adding down the
column.
EXERCISE la Find the value of:
1. 2+3+1+4 L- 8+2+9+5
2. 1 +5+2+3 7. 7+3+8+6
3. 5+2+6+1 8. 5+4+9+1
4. 3+4+2+6 1- 7+3+2+8
5. 5+6+4+2 10; 6+7+5+9
11. 2+5+4+1+3 2®; 3+2+3+4+1+5
12. 4+8+2+1+2 17; 4+2+5+6+1+7
13. 6+7+3+5+6 1®; 8+3+9+2+7+3
14. 4+9+2+8+4 1^. 6+9+4+8+7+5
15. 7+3+9+6+8 20. 4+7+8+6+5+2
1
2 ST(P) Mathematics 1A
21. 3 22. 1 23. 4 24. 9 25. 8

7 9 6 7 7
8 5 7 9 6
±6 ±2 +3 ±8 ±9
26. 3 27. 4 28. 6 29; 7 30. 6

4 2 5 8 7
5 3 3 2 3
1 9 1 1 9
±8 +3 ±4 ±8 ±2
31. 3 32. 5 33. 8 34. 2 35. 4

5 7 7 9 8
2 3 9 5 2
9 5 2 8 9
1 4 8 7 9
+6 +2 +6 +6 +7
AnniTiniu of wuni f imiimrfrs
To add a column of numbers, start with the units:

In the units column, 2+1+3 = 61 so write 6 in the units
column.
83
In the tens column, 0 + 9 + 8 = 17 tens which is 7 tens and
2y 1
1 hundred. Write 7 in the tens column and carry the 1 hundred
+ 702
to the hundreds column to be added to what is there already.
107 6
1 In the hundreds column, 1+7 + 2 = 10 hundreds which is
0 hundreds and 1 thousand.
EXERCISE 1b Find the value of the following sums;
1. 28 2. 35 3. 22 4. 103 5. 56
+ 51 + 62 + 43 + 205 + 203
6. 101 7. 223 8. 492 9; 259 10. 351

25 317 812 28 1026
+ 273 + 342 + 735 + 704 + 915
11. 87 12. 93 13. 3021 14; 9217 15. 6943

102 251 84 824 278
56 179 926 3216 5419
+ 304 + 1312 + 5041 + 8572 + 3604
Addition and Subtraction of Whole Numbers 3
217 + 85 + 976 2 1 7
8 5
+ 976
217 + 85 + 976 = 1278 1 27 8
I I
16. 28 + 72+12 21. 24 + 83 + 76
17. 56+10 + 92 22. 92 + 58 + 27
18. 83+ 107 + 52 23; 52+112 + 38
19. 256+ 139 + 402 24. 207 + 394 + 651
20. 1026 + 398 + 542 25. 943 + 856 + 984
26. 826 + 907 + 329 31. 694 + 706 + 293
27. 562 + 497 + 208 325 + 576 + 481
28. 599 + 107 + 2058 33. 253 + 431 + 1212
29. 642 + 321+4973 821+903 + 3506
30. 555 + 921 + 6049 35. 727 + 652 + 2716
36. 92 + 56+ 109 + 324 41; 624+1315 + 437 + 516
37. 103 + 72 + 58 + 276 42; 2514 + 397 + 3617 + 251
38. 329 + 26 + 73 + 429 43; 752 + 593 + 644 + 237
39. 256 + 82 + 712 + 37 44. 2516 + 374 + 527+152
40. 325 + 293 + 502 + 712 45. 879 + 4658 + 5743 + 652
EXERCISE 1c 1. Find the total cost of baked beans at 27 p, a small loaf of bread
at 36 p and a can of cola at 26 p.
2. In the local corner shop I bought a comic costing 24 p, a pencil

costing 20 p and a packet of sweets costing 25 p. How much did I
spend?
3. There are three classes in the first year of a school. One class has 29
children in it, another class has 31 children in it and the third class has
28 children in it. How many children are there in the first year of the
school?
4. Find the total cost of a washing machine at £306, a cooker at £257

and a fridge at £194.
5. Write the following numbers in figures:

a) two hundred and sixty-one b) three hundred and two
c) three thousand and fifty-six d) thirteen hundred.
6. Write the following numbers in words:

a) 324 b) 5208 c) 150 d) 1500.
7. Add four hundred and fifteen, one hundred and sixy-eight, and
two hundred and four.
8. I have three pieces of string. One piece is 27 cm long, another piece is

34 cm long and the third piece is 16 cm long. What is the total length
of string that I have?
9. Find the total cost of a calculator at £6, a pencil set at £3 and a

cassette at £7.
10. When John went to school this morning it took him 4 minutes to
walk to the station. He had to wait 12 minutes for the train and the
train journey took 26 minutes. He then had an 8 minute walk to his
school. How long did it take John to get to school?
11. Find the sum of one thousand and fifty, four hundred and seven and
three thousand five hundred.
12. A boy decided to save some money by an unusual method. He put 1 p

in his money box the first week, 2 p in the second week, 4 p in the third
week, 8 p in the fourth week, and so on. He gave up after 10 weeks.
Write down how much he put in his money box each week and add it
up to find the total that he had saved. Why do you think he gave up?
SUBTRACTION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
EXERCISE Id Do the following subtractions in your head:
1. 15 2. 19 3. 18 4. 12 5. 15
-4 -7 -4 -7 -8
6. 20-8 IL 15-2 1£. 11-7

7. 18-3 H; 12-9 17; 13-8
8. 17-8 17-6 21; 15-9
9. 14-6 14; 16-8 11: 20-6
10. 10-4 15. 19-9 20. 15-7
You will probably have your own method for subtraction. Use it if you
understand it.
Here is one method:
O (4- I
Start with the units column, then do the tens column and so
XX08
on. If you cannot do the subtraction, take one from the top
- 72 I
number in the next column; this is worth ten in the column on
787
its right.
EXERCISE 1e Find:
642-316
6^*2
- 3 1 6
642-316 =326 3 26
X^7
- 259
907-259 = 648 64 8
1. 526--315 564- 491 i- 283- 157
2. 754--203 6. 395- 254 11; 638- 452
3. 821--415 7. 708- 302 ll- 814- 344
4. 526--308 1: 495- 369 11; 592- 238
13. 578--291 17; 1237--524 21_. 507- 499
14. 635--457 11: 823- 568 3451 -623
15. 602--415 11: 718- 439 23; 5267--444
16. 704--568 20. 308- 159 24. 7374--759

25. 1027-452 29; 4627-3924 33. 3506-3429
26. 3927-583 1203-527 34. 7016-6824
27. 1922-398 4906-829 35. 9342-5147

3L
28. 2704-2515 32. 1516-468 36. 6309-4665
EXERCISE 1f 1. The milk bill for last week was 97 p. I paid with a £5 note (£5 is
500 pence). How much change should I have?
2. In a school there are 856 children. There are 392 girls. How many
boys are there?
3. Find the difference between 378 and 293.
4. Take two hundred and fifty-one away from three hundred and forty.
5. A shop starts with 750 cans of cola and sells 463. How many cans are
left?
6. Subtract two thousand and sixty-five from eight thousand, five

“ hundred and forty-eight.
7. Find the difference between 182 and 395.
8. The road I live in has 97 houses in it. The road my friend lives in has
~ 49 houses in it. How many more houses are there in my road than in
my friend’s road?
9. Ben Nevis is 1343 m high and is the highest mountain in Great

“ Britain. Mount Everest is 8843 m high. How much higher than Ben
Nevis is Mount Everest?
10. My brother is 123 cm tall and I am 142 cm tall. What is the difference
between our heights?
EXERCISE 1g Find the missing digit; it is marked with □:
1. 27-b 38 = 05 50 + 29 = 83
2. 34-b5n = 89 7. 04 + 57 = 81
3. 5n-25 = 32 ^ 03 - 47 = 26
4. 60-48 = 16 9. 25-10 = 6
5. 128 + 059 = 1087 10. 107 + 239 = 416

MIXED ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION
It is the sign in front of a number that tells you what to do with that number.
For example 128 — 56 + 92 means “128 take away 56 and add on 92”. This
can be done in any order so we could add on 92 and then take away 56, i.e.
128-56+92 = 220-56
= 164
EXERCISE 1h Find:
138 + 76-94 138

+ 76
214
138 + 76-94 = 214-94
= 120 214
- 94
120
56- 72 + 39- 14 56
+ 39
95
56-72 + 39- 14 = 95-72- 14
= 23-14 95
-72
= 9 23
1. 25-6 + 7-9 1- 46-12 + 3-9
2. 14 + 2-8-3 7. 27 + 6-11-9
3. 7-4+5-6 1- 2+13-7 + 3-8
4. 19 + 2-4 + 3 9; 7-6+9-1-3
5. 23-2 + 4+5 10; 17 + 4-9-3-5
11. 17-9+11-19 91-50+36-27
12. 36-24 + 62-49 17; 105 + 23-78-50
13. 51 -27-38 + 14 11; 73-42-19 + 27
14. 43-29 + 37 + 16 215-181 + 36-70

11:
15. 124 + 51-78-14 20. 361-200+15-81
21. 213-307-1-198-31 26. 612-318-b219-b84

22. 29-l-108-210-h93 27; 95-161-h75-bl0
23. 493-1000-1-751-140 28. 952- 1010-251-i-438
24. 36-b52-73-b 29-37 29; 278-b 394-506-H 84
25. 78-43-kl5-39-Hl8 107- 1127-1-854-1-231
EXERCISE 1i 1. A boy buys a comic costing 22 p and a pencil costing 18p. He

pays with at 50 p piece. How much change does he get?
2. Find the sum of eighty-six and fifty-four and then take away
sixty-eight.
3. I have a piece of string 200 cm long. I cut off two pieces, one of length
86 cm and one of length 34 cm. How long is the piece of string that I
have left?
4. On Monday 1000 fish fingers were cooked in the school kitchen. At

the first dinner sitting 384 fish fingers were served. At the second
sitting 298 fish fingers were served. How many were left?
5. Find the difference between one hundred and ninety and

eighty-three. Then add on thirty-seven.
A greengrocer has 381b of carrots when he opens on Monday

morning. During the day he gets a delivery of 60 lb of carrots and sells
29 lb of carrots. How many pounds of carrots are left when he closes
on Monday evening?
7. A boy has 30 marbles in his pocket when he goes to school on

Monday morning. At first playtime he wins 6 marbles. At second
playtime he loses 15 marbles. At third playtime he loses 4 marbles.
How many marbles does he now have?
8. What is three hundred and twenty-seven plus two hundred and six
minus four hundred and eighty-eight?
9. Sarah gets 50 p pocket money on Saturday. On Monday she

spends 34 p. On Tuesday she is given 20 p for doing a special job
at home. On Thursday she spends 27 p. How much money has
she got left?
10. Make up a problem of your own that involves adding and subtracting
' numbers.
APPROXIMATION
Display
r~nnn iDN
aM0□
□0 0 9
□00□
□00□
0000
Calculators are very useful and can save a lot of time. Calculators do not
make mistakes but we sometimes do when we use them. So it is important to
know roughly if the answer we get from a calculator is right. By simplifying
the numbers involved we can get a rough answer in our heads.
One way to simplify numbers is to make them into the nearest number of
tens. For example
127 is roughly 13 tens, or 130
and
123 is roughly 12 tens, or 120
We say that 127 is rounded up to 130 and 123 is rounded down to 120. In
mathematics we say that 127 is approximately equal to 13 tens.
We use the symbol « to mean “is approximately equal to”. We would write
127 a: 13 tens
123 % 12 tens
When a number is half way between tens we always round up. We say
125 % 13 tens
EXERCISE 1j Write each of the following numbers as an approximate number of tens:
56 ^ 6 tens
1. 84 3. 46 5. 8 7. 228 9. 73
2. 151 4. 632 6. 37 8 . 155 10. 4

10 ST(P) Mathematics lA
Write each of the following numbers as an approximate number of

hundreds:
1278 a; 13 hundreds
11. 830 13. 780 15. 1350 17. 1560 19. 972
12. 256 14. 1221 16. 450 18. 3780 20. 1965
By writing each number correct to the nearest number of tens find an

approximate answer for:
196 + 58-84
196 % 20 tens
5^ X 6 tens
84 se 8 tens
Therefore 196 + 58-84 20 tens + 6 tens - 8 tens
18 tens = 180
21. 344-87 26; 89-51

22. 95-39 27. 258+108
23. 258-49 28; 391-127
24. 472 + 35 29; 275-99
25. 153+181 832-55
31. 83+27-52 49-25+18

32. 76-31-29 68+ 143 + 73
33. 137-56 + 82 153+19 + 57
34. 241 +37- 124 39; 369-92 + 85
35. 295 + 304-451 40. 250 + 31 - 121
41. 127 + 56 + 82 + 95 83 + 64 + 95 + 51
42. 73 + 21+37 + 46 + 29 47; 63 + 29 + 40 + 37 + 81
43. 33+18 + 27 + 96+53 48; 108 + 16 + 29 + 53 + 85
44. 13 + 29 + 83+ 121 +5 49; 17 + 23 + 46 + 9 + 75
45. 41+82 + 96 + 73 + 36 50; 103+125 + 76 + 41+8
Now use your calculator to find the exact answers to numbers 21 to 50.
Remember to look at your rough answer to check that your calculator
answer is probably right.
MULTIPLICATION AND
DIVISION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
MULTIPLICATION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
You need to know the multiplication facts, that is, the product of any pair
of numbers from the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}. The following exercise
will help you to practise the multiplication facts.
For example 69 x 4 can be found by adding
69 + 69 + 69 + 69
but it is quicker to use the multiplication facts.
Now 69 X 4 = 9 units x 4 + 6 tens x 4

but 9x4 units = 36 units = 3 tens + 6 units
69 so write down 6 units and carry 3 tens.
2<_4_
2 7 6 6 x 4 tens = 24 tens
Then add on the 3 tens carried to give 27 tens which is

2 hundreds + 7 tens.
EXERCISE 2a Find:
24x8
24
X 8
24x8 = 192 1 92
3
1. 23x2 4. 76x4 7. 25x4 10; 83 X 5

2. 42x3 5. 58x5 16x9 11. 47x3
3. 13x8 6. 31 x3 9. 72x2 H; 54x6
13. 21 x6 16. 73x4 19; 67x8 22; 8x21

14. 84x7 17. 2x81 73x9 23; 7x32
15. 36x9 18. 33x4 21. 49x6 24. 9x27
12
Multiplication and Division of Whole Numbers 13
25. 152x4 28. 194x2 31; 953x3 34; 312x7
26. 307 x8 29. 221 X 9 32. 204x8 142x6
27. 256x3 30. 211 x4 33. 876x3 36; 513x5
37. 6x529 40. 579 x9 43; 848x8 46; 694x8
38. 857 x6 41. 658 x7 44. 9x659 47. 236x7
39. 7x498 42. 7x427 45. 748 x7 48. 573 x9
MULTIPLICATION BY 10,100,1000,...
When 85 is multiplied by 10 the 5 units become 5 tens and the 8 tens become
8 hundreds. So
85 X 10 = 850
When 85 is multiplied by 100 the 5 units become 5 hundreds and the 8 tens
become 8 thousands. Thus
85 X 100 = 8500
When 85 is multiplied by 20 this is the same as 85 x2 x 10. So
85 X 20 = 85 X 2 X 10
= 170 X 10
= 1700
In the same way
27 X 4000 = 27 X 4 X 1000
= 108 X 1000
= 108000
EXERCISE 2b
Find 42x900
42
X 9
42 X 900 = 42 X 9 X 100
378
1
= 378X100
= 37 800
Find:
1. 27x 10 6. 27x20 11. 73 X 400
2. 82 X 100 7. 82 X 300 12. 58x60
3. 36x 10 8. 51 x40 13. 221 x30
4. 108 X 10 9. 39 X 200 14. 127x700
5. 256X1000 10. 56x50 15. 73 X 2000
1®; 39 X 900 609 X 80 107x400

17. 157x60 22. 270 X 200 2Z; 240 X 80
1®; 295 X 80 23; 556 X 70 28. 100x88
88x70 81X3000 200 X 95
20. 350 X 200 25. 390x90 30. 856 X 70
LONG MULTIPLICATION
To multiply 84x26 we use the fact that
84 X 26 = 84 X 6 + 84 X 20
This can be set out as
84
x26
504 (84 X 6)
+ 1680 (84 X 20)
2184
EXERCISE 2c
Find 2813x402
2813
X 402
5626 (2813x2)
+ 1125200 (2813x400)
2813 x402 = 1 130826 1130826
Find:
1. 32x21 6. 38 x41 11. 241 X 32

2. 43x 13 7. 107 X 26 12. 153 x262
3. 86x 15 8. 53 x82 13. 433 x921
4. 27x21 9. 74 X 106 14. 1251 x28
5. 34x42 10. 36x89 15. 3421 X 33
11- 512x210 2L 2004 X 43 385 x95

21-
12; 487 X 82 iL- 584 X 97 27. 750 X 450
IS¬ 724 X 98 23; 187 X906 28; 605 X 750
IS. 146x259 24. 270 X 709 2§; 1008 x908
20. 805 x703 25. 3060x470 30. 1500x802
USING A CALCULATOR FOR LONG MULTIPLICATION
Calculators save a lot of time when used for long multiplication. You do,
however, need to be able to estimate the size of answer you expect as a check
on your use of the calculator.
One way to get a rough answer is to round off
a number between 10 and 100 to the nearest number of tens

a number between 100 and 1000 to the nearest number of hundreds
a number between 1000 and 10000 to the nearest number of thousands
and so on.
For example 512x78 ; 500 X 80 = 40000

and 2752X185 « 3000 X 200 = 600000
Estimate:
1. 79x34 6. 59 X 18 11. 159x93

2. 29 X 27 7. 23 x55 12. 82 X 309
3. 84x36 8. 62x57 13. 281X158
4. 45 X 32 9. 136x29 14. 631X479
5. 87x124 10. 52x281 15. 273 X 784
Estimate the answer and then use your calculator to work out the
following:
2581X39
2581 x39 « 3000x40 = 120000 (estimate)
2581 x39 = 100659 (calculator)
16. 258 x947 21. 78x91 26. 52x821
17. 29 X 384 22. 625 X 14 27. 89 X 483
18. 182x56 23. 33 x982 28. 481 x97
19. 37x925 24. 2501 X 12 29. 608x953
20. 782 X 24 25. 87x76 30. 4897x61
31^ 69x78 463 X 87 £1- 37 X 634
32. 47 X 853 37. 271 X 82 42. 541 x428
94 X 552 38. 753 X 749 43; 798 x583
18x47 39. 492 X 47 M: 694x7281
35. 62x98 40. 68 X 529 45. 7215x48
EXERCISE 2e 1. Multiply three hundred and fifty-six by twenty-three.
2. One jar of marmalade weighs 454 grams. Find the weight of 24 jars.
3. On a school outing 8 coaches were used, each taking 34 children.

How many children went on the school outing?
4. A school hall has 30 rows of seats. Each row has 28 seats. How many
seats are there?
5. Find the value of one hundred and fifty multiplied by itself.
6 . A car park has 34 rows and each row has 42 parking spaces. How
many cars can be parked?
7. A supermarket takes delivery of 54 crates of soft drink cans. Each

crate contains 48 cans. How many cans are delivered?
8 . A school day is 7 hours long. How many minutes are there in the
“ school day?
9. A block of flats has 44 storeys. Each storey has 18 flats. How many
flats are there in the block?
10. A light bulb was tested by being left on non-stop. It failed after 28
days exactly. For how many hours was it working?
DIVISION OF WHOLE NUMBERS
36-^8 means “how many eights are there in 36?”. We can find out
by repeatedly taking 8 away from 36;
36-8 = 28
28-8 = 20
So there are 4 eights in 36 with 4 left over.
20-8 = 12
12—8 = 4
Thus 36 -t- 8 = 4, remainder 4.
A quicker way uses the multiplication facts.
We know that 32 = 4 x 8
therefore 36 -h 8 = 4, remainder 4
To find 534^3 start with the hundreds:
5 (hundreds) -h 3 = 1 (hundred), remainder 2 (hundreds)
Take the remainder, 2 (hundreds), with the tens:
23 (tens) -t- 3 = 7 (tens), remainder 2 (tens)
Take the remainder, 2 (tens), with the units:
24 (units) 3 = 8 units
Therefore 534 -3 = 178
This can be set out as:
17 8
3 ) 5^4
EXERCISE 2f Calculate the following and give the remainder when there is one:
45094-5
9 0 1 r4
5) 4 5'’0‘’9
45094-5 = 901, r 4
1. 874-3 6. 974-2 11. 784-8
2. 564-4 7. 73^5 12. 85-7
3. 36-4 6 8. 834-4 13. 39-3
4. 57^3 9. 69-4 3 14. 214-9
5. 724-4 10. 824-6 15. 784-6
11; 54^2 IL 8554-5 M; 294-9
IL 6394-3 ll- 693-4 3 IL 5704-7
548^2 23; 721^7 28; 680-8

11:
6054-3 24; 358-4 5 7314-6
11; 11;
20; 497-4 25; 1924-8 30. 7024-5
IL 35014-3 3^. 64054-6 IL 1788-49
32; 1763-4 37. 7399-4 5 42; 10984-6
33. 48294-2 38. 8772-4 43. 2481-4 7
39. 97124-8 44. 69104-4

ll 1758-5
3852^9 40; 20094-7 45; 7505-5
DIVISION BY 10,100,1000,...
812^ 10 means “how many tens are there in 812”.
There are 81 tens in 810 so
812 10 = 81, remainder 2
2578-r 100 means “how many hundreds are there in 2578”.
There are 25 hundreds in 2500 so
2578 100 = 25, remainder 78

EXERCISE 2g Calculate the following and give the remainder:
1. 256-:- 10 5. 4910^ 1000 9. 94261000
o
00
2. -I- 6. 57^ 10 10. 8512h- 100
3. 196-1-100 7. 186H-10 11. 30774-100
4. 2783^100 8. 2781 ^ 10 12. 5704 H-1000
21 we can set the working out as follows:
There is X twenty-one in 26, r 5 (hundreds).
There are 2 twenty-ones in 57, r 15 (tens).
There are 7 twenty-ones in 158, r 11 (units).
127, rll.
EXERCISE 2h Calculate the following and give the remainder:
2606-4 25
104
25 ) 2606
2606^25 =104, r6 25
106
100
6
If you use your calculator to check your answers, it will give the whole
number part of the answer but it will not give the remainder as a whole
number.
1. 2544-20 5. 394-4 19 9. 3894-23
2. 685= 13 i- 267-4 32 10; 298-4 14
3. 739 = 41 7. 875 = 25 IL 4334-15
4. 862=25 8. 269-4 16 12. 614-4 27

13. 2804=13 17. 2943 = 23 21; 7514=34
14. 7315 = 21 1£. 2694=31 22; 5829 = 43
15. 8392=34 1£. 1875 = 25 23; 6372 = 27
16. 6841=15 20; 3621 = 30 24. 8261 = 38
25. 7315 = 24
29; 7092=35 5009 = 60
26. 8602=15 30; 2694=30 34; 6312 = 43
27. 3004=31 31; 8013 = 40 35; 4321 = 56
28. 1608 = 25 32; 2094=32 36; 7974= 17
37. 103 = 35 41; 700=28 45; 600=54
38. 2050=19 42; 4001 = 36 46; 350= 17
39. 5008 = 45 M: 3900=43 47; 724=36
40. 6100=32 44. 2800= 14 48; 2390=56
829=106 53; 3606=300 3742=600
50; 5241 = 201 8491 = 150 8924= 120
®L 3689= 151 7625 = 302 59; 6643 = 242
52. 8200=250 56. 8110=400 60. 9260=414
MIXED OPERATIONS OF X, -r
When a calculation involves a mixture of the operations +, —, x , we

always do
multiplication and division first
For example:
2x4+ 3x6 = 8 + 18 (multiplication first)
= 26
EXERCISE 2i Find;
2 + 3x6-8-^-2
2 + 3x6 — 8-f-2 = 2+18 — 4 (x and -f- done first)
= 16
5-10x2-h5 + 3
5-10x2-5 + 3 = 5-20-5 + 3 (x done)
= 5-4+3 (— done)
= 4
1. 2+4x6-8 7+4-3x2
2. 24-8-3 7. 8-2+6x3
3. 6 + 3x2 14x2-7-3 + 6
4. 7x2+6-l 9; 6-2x3+7
5. 18-3-3x2 1£. 5+4x3+8-2
11. 7+3x2-8-2
1®; 9+3-6-2+1
12. 5-4-2+7x2 17; 6-3x2+9-3
13. 6x3 — 8 x2
1®; 7+2x4-8-4
14. 9-3 + 12-6

1®; 7x2+8x3—2x6
15. 12-3-15-5 20; 5x3 X 2 —2 X 3x4
21. 10x3-15 + 6 26; 5x4-10 + 6
22. 8+7x4-2 27; 6 X 3 —9 + 2 x 4
23. 3x8-4+7 28; 7+3x2-6
24. 9-3+7X2 2^ 8-4+6-i-2
25. 4-8-2+6 30. 12-4 + 3x2

IL 19 + 3x2-8 = 2 36; 5x3x4=12 + 6-2
32; 7x2-3+6=2 37; 5 + 6x2-84-2 + 9=3
8+3x2-4=2 38; 7-94-3 + 6x2-4=2
7x2-4=2+l 39; 9=3-2+l+6x2
35; 6+8=4+2x3x4 4x2-64-3 + 3x2x4
USING BRACKETS
If we need to do some addition and/or subtraction before multiplication

and division we use brackets round the section that is to be done first. For
example 2x(3 + 2) means work out 3 + 2 first.
So 2 X (3 + 2) = 2x5
= 10
For a calculation with brackets and a mixture of x , =, + and — we first

work out the inside of the Brackets, then we do the Multiplication and
Division, and lastly the Addition and Subtraction.
The capital letters in the last sentence are the same as those in the following
sentence:
Bless My Dear Aunt Sally
This should help you remember the order of working.
EXERCISE 2j Find:
2x(3x6-4) + 7-12h-6
2x(3x6 —4) + 7—12-t-6 = 2x14 + 7—12 = 6 (inside bracket first)
= 28 + 7-2 (X and 4- next)
= 33 (lastly + and —)
1. 12 = (5+1) 1- (3-2) X (5 + 3)
2. 8x(3 + 4) T. 7x(12-5)
3. (5-2) X 3 1- (6 + 2) = 4
4. (6+l)x2 9. (8+l)x(2 + 3)
5. (3+ 2) X (4-1) 10. (9-l) = (6-2)

11. 2 + 3x(3 + 2) 16. 6^(10-8) + 4
12. 7-2x(5-3) 17. 7x(12-6)-12
13. 8-5 + 2x(4 + 3) 18. 12-8-3x(9-8)
14. 2x(7-2)-(16-ll) 19. 4x(15-7)-(17-9)
15. 4 + 3x(2-l) + 8-(9-7) 5x(8-2) + 3x(7- 5)
20;
iL 6x8-18^(2 + 4) 26. (18^3 + 3)-^(4x4--7)

22; 10^5 + 20-(4+l) 27. (50h-5 + 6)-(8x2--4)
23; 5 + (2x 10-5)-6 28; (10x3-20) + 3x(9 -3 + 2)
24. 8-(15-3 + 4)+l (7-3x2)^(8-4- 1)
20;
25; (2x3-4) + (33-ll + 5) 30; (5 + 3)x2+10-t-(8--3)
EXERCISE 2k
In the greengrocer’s I bought 3 oranges that cost 12 p each
and one cabbage that cost 36 p. I paid with a £1 coin. How
much change did I get?
Cost of the oranges = 36 p
Cost of the cabbage = 36p
Total cost = 72p
Change from £1 = lOOp—72p
= 28p
1. How many apples costing 8p each can I buy with 50 p?
2. I bought 5 oranges that cost 10 p each and 2 lemons that cost 9 p each.
How much did I spend?
3. If a coach holds 30 children how many coaches are needed to take 420
children on a school outing?
4. Three children went into a sweet shop. The first child bought three
sweets costing 2 p each, the second child bought three sweets costing
1 p each and the third child bought three sweets costing 3 p each. How
much money did they spend altogether?
5. A girl saves the same amount each week. After 8 weeks she has 64 p.
How much does she save each week?
ST(P) Mathematics 1A
6. I bought five stamps at 17 p each. How much change did I get from
lOOp?
7 . A car travelling at 50 miles an hour took 3 hours to travel from

London to Cardiff. How many miles did the car travel?
8. A club started the year with 82 members. During the year 36 people
left and 28 people joined. How many people belonged to the club at
the end of the year?
9. One money box has five 5 p pieces and four 10 p pieces in it. Another
money box has six 10 p pieces and ten 2 p pieces in it. What is the total
sum of money in the two money boxes?
10. A greengrocer bought a sack of potatoes weighing 50 kg. He divided

the potatoes into bags, so that each bag held 3 kg of potatoes. How
many complete bags of potatoes did he get from his sack?
11. At a school election one candidate got 26 votes, and the other
candidate got 35 votes. 10 voting papers were spoiled and 5 pupils did
not vote. How many children could have voted altogether?
12. I bought five pencils costing 12 p each. How much change did I get
from £1?
13. Three children are given 60 p to split equally amongst them. How
much does each child get?
14. A person can walk up a flight of steps at the rate of 30 steps a minute.
It takes him 3 minutes to reach the top. How many steps are there?
15. An extension ladder is made of three separate parts, each 300 cm

long. There is an overlap of 30 cm at each junction when it is fully
extended. How long is the extended ladder?
16. Jane, Sarah and Claire come to school with 20 p each. Jane owes
Sarah 10 p and she also owes Claire 5 p. Sarah owes Jane 4 p and she
also owes Claire 8p. When all their debts are settled, how much
money does each girl have?
17. At the newsagent’s I buy two comics costing 24 p each, and a

magazine costing £1.10. How much change do I get from £5?
18. A man gets paid £ 105 for a five day working week. How much does he
get paid a day?
19. The total number of children in the first year of a school is 500. There
are 50 more girls than boys. How many of each are there?
20. 4000 apples are packed into boxes, each box holding 75 apples. How
many boxes are required?
21. In a book of street plans of a town, the street plans start on page 6 and
end on page 72. How many pages of street plans are there?
22. My great-grandmother died in 1894, aged 62. In which year was she
born?
23. How many times can 5 be taken away from 132?
24. An oak tree was planted in the year in which Lord Swell was born. He
died in 1940, aged 80. How old was the oak tree in 1984?
25. A mountaineer starts from a point which is 150 m above sea level. He
climbs 200 m and then descends 5 0 m before climbing another 300 m.
How far is he now above sea level?
26. A bus leaves the bus station at 9.30 a.m. It reaches the Town Hall at
9.40 a.m. and gets to the railway station at 9.52 a.m. How long does it
take to go from the Town Hall to the railway station?
27. A class is told to work out the odd numbered questions in an exercise
containing 30 questions. How many questions do they have to do?
28. In the hardware shop I bought 3 screws that cost 5 p each and 2 light
bulbs that cost 30 p each. I paid with a 50 p piece and two 20 p pieces.
How much change did I get?
29. A vegetable plot is 1000 cm long. Cabbages are planted in a row down
the length of the plot. If the cabbages are planted 30 cm apart and the
first cabbage is planted 5 cm from the end, how many cabbages can be
planted in one row?
30. A train timetable reads as follows:
Euston depart 9.30 a.m.

Rugby arrive 10.30 a.m.
depart 10.35 a.m.
Birmingham arrive 11.00 a.m.
How long does the journey from Euston to Rugby take?

How long does the journey from Rugby to Birmingham take?
31. Write down a question that uses the same numbers and gives the
same answer as the problem in question 28.
NUMBER PATTERNS
EXERCISE 21
2 7 6
This is a magic square.
9 5 1
The numbers in every row, in every column and in each
diagonal add up to 15.
4 3 8
Copy and complete the following magic squares. Use the numbers 1 to 9
just once in each, and use a pencil in case you need to rub out!
8 4 9
5 5
4 2 1
3. Use each of the numbers 1 to 16 just once to complete the 4 x 4 magic

square below. Each row, column and diagonal should add up to 34.
15
9 5 16
8 1 13
4. Make up a 3x3 magic square of your own. Use the numbers 1 to 9

just once each and put 5 in the middle.
5. 1, 3, 5, 7, . . . This is a sequence. By looking at it you should be

able to find the rule for getting the next number.
In this sequence, the next number is always 2 bigger than the number
before it.
Write down the next two numbers in this sequence.
In questions 6 to 17 write down the next two numbers in the sequence:
6. 1, 4, 7, 10, 10. 3, 6, 9, 12, 14. 1, 10, 100, 1000,
7. 12, 10, 8, 6, 11. 64, 32, 16, 8, 15. 81, 72, 63, 54,
8. 1, 5, 9, 13, 12. 1, 3, 9, 27, 16. 3, 7, 11, 15,
9. 2, 4, 8, 16, 13. 4, 9, 16, 25, 17. 5, 10, 17, 26,

18. Consider the following pattern:
1 =1=1x1
1+3 =4 = 2x2
1 +3+5 = 9 = 3x3
1+3 + 5 + 7 = 16 = 4x4
Write down the next three lines in this pattern.

Now try and write down (without adding them up) the sum of
a) the first eight odd numbers b) the first twenty odd numbers.
19. Consider the following pattern:
2 =2=1x2
2+4 = 6 = 2x3
2+4+6 = 12 = 3x4
2 + 4+6 + 8 = 20 = 4x5
Write down the next three lines in this pattern.

How many consecutive even numbers, beginning with 2 have a sum
of 156? (156 = 12x 13).
Try to find the pattern in the given triangle of

numbers. Can you write down the next three
rows?
Fifteen red snooker balls are placed in the

frame as shown. A second layer is then placed
on top so that they rest on these in the spaces
marked with crosses. This is followed by more
layers until there is a single ball at the top of
the pyramid. How many balls are needed to
make this pyramid?
22. This is a class game. Start with a number and then each pupil in turn
adds on a fixed number to the last number called. For example if you
start with 5 and each pupil adds on 4 to the last number called, it will
go 5, 9, 13, 17, ... If you make a mistake you are out.
ST(P) Mathematics 1A
23. A different version of the game in question 22 is to start with a

fairly high number and then each pupil in turn subtracts a fixed
number from the last one called.
24. • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • ••• ••••
Diagram number 12 3 4
a) Write down a list of the numbers of dots used to form these

squares.
b) How many dots would be needed to form the next square?
c) These numbers are called square numbers. Write down the

next two square numbers.
d) The difference between the first two numbers is 4-1, i.e. 3,

and the difference between the second and third numbers is
9-4, i.e. 5.
Write down the differences between the third and fourth
numbers and the fourth and fifth numbers. What do you
notice?
25. •
• • •
• • • • • •
Diagram number 12 3 4
a) Form a number list for the number of dots in each diagram.

These numbers are called triangular numbers. Write down the
next three numbers in this pattern.
b) Write down the differences between consecutive numbers in

this pattern.
c) Write down the differences between consecutive numbers in

the pattern you got in part (b).
26. Write down the pattern you get by starting with 3 and adding 5
each time. What is the eighth number in this pattern?
27. Write down the pattern you get by starting with 1 and
multiplying by 2 each time. What is the sixth number in this
pattern?
28. For each of the patterns given below write down
(i) the next three numbers
(ii) the differences between consecutive terms
(hi) the differences between consecutive terms in the pattern

found in part (ii)
a) 4, 8, 12, 16 c) 2, 4, 8, 16
b) 4, 9, 14, 19 d) 2, 6, 18, 54
29. Write down the numbers 1 and 2. Make a pattern using this
rule: the next number you write is the sum of the two previous
numbers. What is the eleventh number in this pattern?
30. Write down the numbers 1 and 2. Make a pattern using this
rule: the next number in the pattern is the result of multiplying
the two previous numbers together. What is the seventh number
in the pattern?
31. Write down the missing numbers in this sequence:
3, 9, □, 21, 27, □,...
Copy and complete this sentence:

To get this pattern, start with 3 then . . .’
32. Write down the missing numbers in the pattern
842nini-i-
Copy and complete this sentence:

‘To get this pattern, start with 8 then . . .’
33. Write down the missing numbers in the pattern
i i 1, □, □, 27, 81, 243
and then copy and complete the sentence:

To get this pattern, start with ^ and . . .’
□ '
34.
□ n P
r — c 1 _ □
U P1 _ n n
rtJT
_□
Draw the next two diagrams for this pattern.
How many squares are used to make

a) the fifth diagram in the pattern
b) the eighth diagram in the pattern?
35. Draw the next three diagrams

for this pattern.
How many squares are used to

make
a) the fifth diagram in the
pattern
b) the ninth diagram in the
pattern?
36. Make up a rule of your own for forming a number pattern. Give
it to your neighbour and see if he/she gets the pattern you had in
mind.
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 2m Find.
1. 126 + 501 + 378 5. 350 + 8796-2538
2. 153-136 6. 8x321-1550
3. 76x9 7. 35 + 86 + 94 + 27
4. 84-^3 8. 20-h(9-4) + 3
9. How many packets of popcorn costing 15 p each can I buy with £1?
10. I buy three bars of chocolate costing 28 p each. How much

change do I get from £1?
\ EXERCISE 2n Find:
1. 92 + 625+153 5. (7 + 30) X 2-45
2. 247-193 6. 382-7924-3
3. 84x8 7. 68-42+12x2
4- 79^8 8. 79-35 + 56-63
9. How many times can 6 be taken away from 45?
10. The contents of a tin of sweets weighs 2500 grams. The sweets are
' divided into packets each weighing 500 grams. How many packets of
sweets can be made up?
EXERCISE 2p Find:
1. 296+1025 + 983 5. 2501^9
2. 347-84 6. 7863-20
3. 7x59 7. 940 + 360-1040
4. 106x32 8. 2983- 150
9. A youth dub has 80 members. There are 10 more boys than girls.
How many of each are there?
10. There were two candidates in a school election and they got 25 votes
and 32 votes. 10 voting papers were spoiled. If 100 children could
have voted, how many children did not vote?
EXERCISE 2q Find:
1. 749 + 821 + 1563 5. 2781- 10
00
oo
o
2. 278- 109 6.
•1-
1
3. 205 X 40 7. 15-4x(12-9)
4. 284 X 16 8. 54 + (7x8-10) + 32
9. I buy three stamps costing 22 p each. How much change do I get

from £1?
10. Write down a question which uses the same numbers and gives the
same answer as the problem in question 9.
FRACTIONS:
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION
THE MEANING OF FRACTIONS
Think of cutting a cake right through the middle into two equal
pieces. Each piece is one half of the cake. One half is a fraction,
written as 7.
If we cut the cake into four equal pieces, each piece is one quarter,
written j, of the cake. When one piece is taken away there are three
pieces left, so the fraction that is left is three quarters, or f.
When the cake is divided into five equal slices, one slice is y, two
slices is f, three slices is f and four slices is j of the cake.
Notice that the top number in each fraction (called the numerator)
tells you how many slices and the bottom number (called the
denominator) tells you about the size of the slices.
Fractions: Addition and Subtraction 33
EXERCISE 3a In each of the following sketches, write down the fraction that is
shaded:
It is not only cakes that can be divided into fractions. Anything at all
that can be split up can be divided into fractions.
Write down the fraction that is shaded in each of the following

diagrams:
9.
!
_J_^_
1
ONE QUANTITY AS A FRACTION OF ANOTHER
Quite a lot of things are divided into equal parts. For instance a week
IS divided into seven days, so each day is ^ of a week. One pound is
divided into one hundred pence, so each penny is of a pound.
EXERCISE 3b
In June there were 23 sunny days. What fraction of June was
sunny?
There are 30 days in June.
23 sunny days = of June
1. One hour is divided into 60 minutes. What fraction of an hour

is
a) one minute b) nine minutes c) thirty minutes

d) forty-five minutes?
2. You go to school on five days each week. What fraction of a

week is this?
3. In the month of January, snow fell on eleven days. What

fraction of all the days in January had snow falls?
In questions 4 to 13 write the first quantity as a fraction of the second

quantity:
Write 10 minutes as a fraction of 1 hour.
(We must always use the same unit for both quantities.
This time we will use minutes, so we want to write 10
minutes as a fraction of 60 minutes.)
10 minutes = ^ of 1 hour
4. 51 days; 1 year (not a leap year)
5. 35p;£l
6. 90p; £5
7. 35 seconds; 3 minutes
8. 3 days; the month of January
9. 17 days; the months of June and July together
10. 5 days; 3 weeks
11. £1.50; £5
12. 45 minutes; 2 hours
13. 37 seconds; 1 hour
14. A boy gets 80 p pocket money. If he spends 45 p, what fraction

of his pocket money is left?
15. In a class of thirty-two children, ten take French, eight take

music and twenty-five take geography. What fraction of the
children in the class take
a) French b) music c) geography?
16. A girl’s journey to school costs 15 p on one bus and 25 p on

another bus. What fraction of the total cost arises from each
bus?
17. In an orchard there are twenty apple trees, eighteen plum trees,
fourteen cherry trees and ten pear trees. What fraction of all the
trees are
a) apple trees b) pear trees c) not cherry trees?
18. In a Youth Club with 37 members, 12 are more than 15 years

old and 8 are under 14 years old. What fraction of the members
are
a) over 15 b) under 14 c) 14 and over?
19. During a summer holiday of fourteen days there were three

rainy days, two cloudy days and all the other days were sunny.
What fraction of the holiday was
a) sunny b) rainy?
EQUIVALENT FRACTIONS
In the first sketch below, a cake is cut into four equal pieces. One
slice is j of the cake.
In the second sketch the cake is cut into eight equal pieces. Two slices
is f of the cake.
In the third sketch the cake is cut into sixteen equal slices. Four slices
is of the cake.
But the same amount of cake has been taken each time.
1 _ 2 _ 4
Therefore
4 “ 8 “ l6
and we say that j, f and ^ are equivalent fractions.
1 _ 1 x2 _ 2 1 _ 1 x4 _ 4
Now and
4 “ 4x2 “ 8 4 “ 4x4 "" 16
So all we have to do to find equivalent fractions is to multiply the

numerator and the denominator by the same number. For instance
1 _ 1 x3 _ 3
4 “ 4x3 “ 12
1 _ 1 x5 _ 5
and
4 “ 4x5 ~ ^
Any fraction can be treated in this way.

EXERCISE 3c In questions 1 to 6 draw cake diagrams to show that:
1 2 1 2 2 6
1. 3. — = — 5. — = —
3 "" 6 5 10 3 9
1 3 3 9 2 8
2. 4. 6. _ = —
2 6 4 “ 12 3 12
In questions 7 to 33 fill in the missing numbers to make equivalent

fractions:
1 _ 3
5 “ ~
(If j = - the numerator has been multiplied by 3)
1 _ 1 x3 _ 3
5 ~ 5x3 ~ Is
1 _
5 “ ^
(If k = 20 the denominator has been multiplied by 4)
1 _ 1 x4 _ 4
5 “ 5x4“ W
1 2 1 3 9 90
7. 11. 15.
3^ ~ 6 “ To “
2 1 1
8. 11:
—
Il¬
—
5 "" 10 3 “ 12 6 36
3 9 2 6 4
9. ly. — = —
11; 5 5 20
1^ ~
9 3 2 12
10. 14. — 18.
To “ 40 7 “ 28 ■■■“ 3 “
2 4 2 20
19. 24. - = — 29;
9 “ — 9 36 9
3 3 3000
20. 25 30-
8 “ ^ —■■ 8 800 8 “
5 5 50 5
21.
IT ~ ^ TT = - IL IT "" l2T
4 8 4 400
22. 27. - = — 32;
5 ~ ^ — 5 50 5 “
23.
1 10 -.o 1 100 1 1000
To ~ - 10 To “
34. Write each of the following fractions as an equivalent fraction

with denominator 24:
2
3
2 2x8 16
3 “ 3^ ~ ^
5
35. Write each of the following fractions in equivalent form with
denominator 45:
0 ^ d) i e) —
^5 '^3 ^ 15 "5
Find an equivalent fraction with denominator 36 for each of the

following fractions:
37; Change each of the following fractions into an equivalent

fraction with numerator 12:
6 4
e) -
'>7 “>5 ' 3
38. Some of the following equivalent fractions are correct but two
of them are wrong. Find the wrong ones and correct them by
altering the numerator:
2 6 3 6
c) - = —
"^5=15 ' 1 14
77
d) - = —
’ 9 27 Too
COMPARING THE SIZES OF FRACTIONS
Suppose that we want to see which is bigger, f or f. Before we can

compare these two fractions we must change them into the same kind
of fraction. That means we must find equivalent fractions that have
the same denominator. This denominator must be a number that both
7 and 3 divide into. So our new denominator is 21. Now
5 15 ^ 2 14
- = — and - = —
7 21 3 21
We can see that ^ is bigger than i.e. y is bigger than f.
We often use the symbol > instead of writing the words “is bigger
than”. Using this symbol we could write jf > if > so f > f.
Similarly we use < instead of writing “is less than”.
EXERCISE 3d In the following questions find which is the bigger fraction:
3 7
- or —
5 11
33 1^ 35
and (55 divides by 5 and by 11)
IT 55
So XY is the bigger fraction.
1 1 2 4 2
1. — or r 3. _ or - 5.
2 3 3 5 7
3 5 2 1 2
2. — or - 4. or - 6.
4 6 9 7 3
2 3 3 1 3 4
7. or - 9. or - 11. —
or
5 7 8 5 5 7
5 3 4 6 3 2
8. or - 10; or - 12. or -
6 5 5 7 4 3
1 3 1 2 9 7
13. - or — 17. or - 21. — or -
4 11 4 7 11 9
5 3 5 4 2 1
14. - or - 11; or - 22. or -
7 5 8 7 5 3
3 5 2 3 4 3
15. - or —
8 11 11; 9
or —
11
23; ^ or -
7 5
3 4 5 7 5 6
16. — or — 20; or 24. or —-
10 11 7 9 8 11
In questions 25 to 36, put either > or < between the fractions:
2 3
5 7
0
P 2 14 3 15
- = — and - = — (35 divides by 5 and by 7)
Fi 5 35 7 35 ^ ^ ^ '
Sof<f
1 2 1 4 5
25. 33.
4 7 4 9 IT
2 5 1 2 1
26. 30.
3 8 3 5 7
3 1 3 2 3
27. 31.
7 2 5 3 4
5 7 2 1 7 7
28. 32. 36.
8 To 9 5 8 9
Arrange the following fractions in ascending order:
3^14
4’ To’ 2’ 5
3 _ 15
4 “ M
7 _ H
To “ M
(20 divides by 4, 10, 2 and 5)
1 _ 10
2 “ 20
4 _ 16
5 ~ 20
So the ascending order is yfe, f.
2 13 7 2 3 17 1 7
37. 40;
3’ 2’ 5’ 30 5’ 8’ 20’ 2’ 10
13 3 4 5 5 11 3 17 1
38.
20’ 4’ To’ 8 7’ 14’ 4’ 28’ 2
15 17 7 2 3 14 1
39. 42;
3’ 6’ 2’ 12 To’ 5’ 5’ 2
Arrange the following fractions in descending order:
5 1 7 11 2 7 11 2 23 4
43. 46.
6’ 2’ 9’ 18’ 3 10’ 15’ 3’ 30’ 5
13 3 1 3 7 7 1 5 19 3
44.
20’ 5’ 2’ 4’ 10 16’ 2’ 8’ 32’ 4
7 1 2 17 3 4 7 5 13
45. 48;
12’ 6’ 3’ 24’ 4 5’ T2’ 6’ 2’ 4
SIMPLIFYING FRACTIONS
Think of the way you find equivalent fractions. For example
2 _ 2x7 _ 14
5 “ 5x7 “ 35
Looking at this the other way round we see that
14 _ tx2 _ 2
35 \x5 5
In the middle step, 7 is a factor of both the numerator and the

denominator and it is called a common factor. To get the final value
of f we have “crossed out” the common factor and this is called
cancelling. What we have really done is to divide the top and the
bottom by 7 and this simplifies the fraction.
When all the simplifying is finished we say that the fraction is in its
lowest terms.
Any fraction whose numerator and denominator have a common

factor (perhaps more than one) can be simplified in this way. Suppose,
for example, that we want to simplify §7. As 3 is a factor of 24 and
of 27, we say
24 _ 3 X 8 _ 8
^ “ 3^ “ 9
A quicker way to write this down is to divide the numerator and the
denominator mentally by the common factor, crossing them out and
writing the new numbers beside them (it is a good idea to write the
new numbers smaller so that you can see that you have simplified the
fraction), i.e.
_ 8
“ 9
EXERCISE 3e Simplify the following fractions;
66
l76
_ 3
“8
(We divided top and bottom by 2 and then by 11.)
2 3 10
1. 3. 9.
6 9
30 6 4 12 8
2. 4. 6. 8. 10.
I2 8 Is
8 14 16 36 60
11. 13. IL-
28 70 56 11- 72 1®;
27 24 10 15 36
12. 14. 1®; 20;
90 30 1®; 75 90
70 99 80 54 27
21. 23. 25; 27. 29;
126 l32 HK) 162 36
49 33 48 54 800
22. 24.
77 I2T 1000
ADDING FRACTIONS
Suppose there is a bowl of oranges and apples. First you take three
oranges and then two more oranges. You then have five oranges; we
can add the 3 and the 2 together because they are the same kind of
fruit. But three oranges and two apples cannot be added together
because they are different kinds of fruit.
For fractions it is the denominator that tells us the kind of fraction,

so we can add fractions together if they have the same denominator
but not while their denominators are different.
EXERCISE 3f Add the fractions, simplifying the answers where you can:
2 3
1^1
2 3 _ 2+3
7"*"? “ ~1~
_ 5
“ 7
9 5
^'^12
9 5 _ 9+5
p}'
1
~ YT
Add the fractions given in questions 1 to 24, simplifying the answers

where you can:
1 2 11 8 2 9
1. -+- 1- —+ — 9; -1-
4 4 23 23 21 21
1 3 1 2 7 8
2. -+- i- -+- 10.
8 8 7 7
3 2 2 1 6 5
3. -1- 7. -+- -1-
11 11 5 5 IL 13 13
3 7 3 1 1 7
4. —+ — 8. —+ — 12; -1—~
13 13 10 10 10 10
2 4 5 7 4 2
13. —+— 17. -—1-
7 7 '■ ■ " 16 16 IL 11 11
4 5 8 3 14 1
14. -- 11; 11; -1-
17 17 19'^19 23 23
3 4 3 7 11 5
15. 1£. 11: -1——
m"*” 14 20^^ 18 18
8 19 21 19 7 3
16. -1- 20. -1- 24. -1-
30 30 100 100 15 15
We can add more than two fractions in the same way.
Add the fractions given in questions 25 to 34:
3 5 8
3 5 S _3+5+8
“ 17
16
=
17
2 4 6 1 3 5 2
25. -1-1- 28; —7 —7 -h
15 15 15 14 14 14 14
8 21 11 2 4 6 8 7
26. - - 29. TT ~—h -h -1-
100 100 100 51 51 51 51 51
3 2 7 11 3 2 7
27. -- 30. __ _j_ H"
31 31 31 31 19 19 l9
7 8 11 3 14 31 2
?L 7a 3" + 77: 33. + -h
60 60 100 100
4 11 8 2 3 11 4 7
32. Tr "h — + —Z + — -1-H H-
45 45 45 45 M: 99 99 99
FRACTIONS WITH DIFFERENT DENOMINATORS
To add fractions with different denominators we must first change the

fractions into equivalent fractions with the same denominator. This
new denominator must be a number that both original denominators
divide into. For instance, if we want to add f and y we choose 35
for our new denominator because 35 can be divided by both 5 and 7:
2 _ 14
5 ~ S
3 _ 15
7 “ 35
2 3 _ 14 15 _ 29
So
EXERCISE 3g Find:
2 3
(7 and 8 both divide into 56)
23 16 21 37
7'^8 ~ '%'^56 “ 56
2 1 C 3 2 1 2
1. 7 4' 7 9; — -I-
3 5 — 10 3 6 7
1 3 « 4 1 5 1
2. G. —1— 10; -1-
5 8 — 7 8 6 7
1 1 3 5
3. 7+7 7. -+ - 11. -1“ —
5 6 — 7 6 119
2 3 0 2 2 2 3
4. 7+7 8. y+- -1-
5 7 — 3 7 11: 9 10
The new denominator, which is called the common denominator, is not

always as big as you might first think. For instance, if we want to
add j and the common denominator is 12 because it divides by
both 4 and 12.
3 1
4"^T2
3 1 _ 9 1
4'^T2 “ 12^ 12
_
_ 5
“ 6
2 3 1 7 1 3
13. ~ + 77: 17. -+— 21. —+ -
5 10 4 10 20 5
3 7 1 3 4 5
14. — + —: 18. -+- 22. ~+—
8 16 4 8 11 22
3 8 2 2 2 7
15. — + —- 19. -+- 23. -+—
7 21 3 9 5 15
3 3 4 5 7 1
16. -+— 24. —+-
9 18 12 6
More than two fractions can be added in this way. The common
denominator must be divisible by all of the original denominators.
1 1 1
rt-"3
(8, 2 and 3 all divide into 24)
1 1 1 _ 3 12 8
8’^2’'’3 “
3 + 12 + 8
“ 24
23
1 1 1 1 3 1 7 3 1
25. 29; 33. -1-1-
5^ 4'^ 2 7+14 + 2 20 10 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
26. 30. 34;
8+4+ 3 3+6+2
3 2 1 1 3 1 1 2
27. 3L-
35;
10 + 5 + 4 2'+8+ 10
5 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
28. 32; 36;
12 + 6 + 3 3+9+6
SUBTRACTING FRACTIONS
Exactly the same method is used for subtracting fractions as for

adding them. To work out the value of notice that the
denominators are the same, so
7 3 _ 7-3
8 ~ 8 ” 8
_A''
_ 1
“ 2
EXERCISE 3h
7 1
Find
9 4
(The denominators are not the same so we use equivalent

fractions with denominator 36.)
7 1 _ 28 9
9~ 4 “ ^ ~ ^
28-9
^ 36
_ 19
^ 36
Find:
9 1 2 3
5. 9.
9 9 lo ~ 2 3 7
5 2 4 1
2- i-- 6. —- —
m _ _ _
10 10 7 7 7 3
3. A-1
8 3 11 4
7. 11.
17 17 13 ~ 13 15 15
19 7 13 7
4. ^-1 8.
4 5 20 2L 18 18
13.1-2 19 1 3 5
17. 21.
11 5 100 ~ To 4 ‘"8
14. Z-2 5 2 7 1
18. — — — 22;
9 3 8 7 12 “ 3
15 3 13 5
1£. — —- —
23.
16 4 Is ~ 9
7 1 13
- 20;
15 ~' 5
24;
15 “ 5
3
ADDING AND SUBTRACTING FRACTIONS
Fractions can be added and subtracted in one problem in a similar

way. For example
7 1 _ U j__ 3
9"^ 18 6 “ 18
14+1-3
18
12
Is
2
3
Fractions: Addition and Subtraction
It is not always possible to work from left to right in order because

we have to subtract too much too soon. In this case we can do the
adding first. Remember that it is the sign in front of a number that
tells you what to do with that number.
EXERCISE 3i Find:
1 3 n
8 “ 4"^ 16
1 3 11 _ 2 _ |2 n
8 ^ 4"^ 16 “ 16 “ 16“^ 16
13-12
“ 16
1
“ l6
3 1 7 3 3 21 7 41 1
1. 9;
1- 5+ ' 50 To “ T^'^20
4+2 “ 8
6 9 1 2 1 5 5 21 2
6. 10;
2.
7 ■ 14 "^2 3 + 6 ~ T2 8 “■ 40 “^5
3 7 3 4 7 1 7 1 1
3. 7. 21:
8 + l6 4 5 ~' To + 2 V2 “6 + 3
11 1 2 7 2 5 2 7 2
8. 12;
4.
12'^ 6 3 9 “■ 3^6 3 “■ T8 + 9
2 1 1 1 5 1 3 61 1
13. 17; 21;
9 “■ 3'^ 6 6 "‘ Is + 3 To “ Tw + 2
1 2 1 1 7 17 1 7 5
14. 1^ 22;
6 "~ 3"^ 12 5 '' To “^20 8 '" 24 + T2
2 1 3 1 5 1 1 5 2
15. 23;
5 "” 2"^ 10 4 ‘" 8‘^2 3 "“ T8 + 9
1 13 3 2 5 1 3 2 2
16. 20; 24;
8 '” T6'^4 3 '~ 6'^2 To + T5 “ 5
PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 3j
In a class of school children, j of the children come to

school by bus, \ come to school on bicycles and the rest
walk to school. What fraction of the children ride to
school? What fraction do not use a bus?
The fraction who ride to school on bicycle and bus = - + -

3 4
_ 4+3
12
7
~ 12
Therefore of the children ride to school.
The complete class of children is a whole unit, i.e. 1.

The fraction of children who do not use a bus is found by
taking the bus users from the complete class, i.e.
1 1 _ 3-1 _ 2
1 3 “ 3 “ 3
1_. A girl spends j of her pocket money on sweets and | on

records. What fraction has she spent? What fraction has she left?
A group of friends went to a hamburger bar. f of them bought a

hamburger, j of them just bought chips. The rest bought cola.
What fraction of the group bought food? What fraction bought a
drink?
At a pop festival, f of the groups were all male, ^ of the groups

had one girl and the rest had more than one girl. What fraction
of the groups
a) were not all male b) had more than one girl?
At a Youth Club, j of the meetings are for playing table tennis,

8 of the meetings are discussions and the rest are record sessions.
What fraction of the meetings are
a) record sessions b) not for discussions?
5. At a school, | of the time is spent in mathematics classes, ^ of

” the time in English classes and ^ on games. What fraction of the
time is spent on
a) English and maths together b) all lessons except games
c) maths and games?
MIXED NUMBERS AND IMPROPER FRACTIONS
Most of the fractions we have met so far have been less than a whole
unit. These are called proper fractions. But we often have more than a
whole unit. Suppose, for instance, that we have one and a half bars of
chocolate:
1 whole bar
We have Ij bars, and Ij is called a mixed number.
Another way of describing the amount of chocolate is to say that we

have three half bars.
We have | bars and f is called an improper fraction because the

numerator is bigger than the denominator.
But the amount of chocolate in the two examples is the same, so
Improper fractions can be changed into mixed numbers by finding out

how many whole units there are. For instance, to change | into a
mixed number we look for the biggest number below 8 that divides by
3, i.e. 6. Then
8 _ 6+2
3 “ 3
EXERCISE 3k In questions 1 to 20 change the improper fractions into mixed

numbers:
11
4
1 5 _ 12 + 3
4 4
1. 9 37 88 27
4 3. 6 5. 7. 9; 127
9 4 5
2. 19 53 7 41
4 4. i- 10; 1 14
10 2 i- 8 1 1
11. 109 121 87 41

8
13. 9 15; 17; 73
1 1 3 11; 3
12. 83
7 14. 91
1£. 77 67 49
6 6 11: 5 11; 10
We can also change mixed numbers into improper fractions. For

instance, in 2f we have two whole units and f. In each whole unit
there are five fifths, so in 2f we have ten fifths and four fifths, i.e.
2± - 10 ,4 _ 14
5 ~ 5^5-5~
31 In questions 1 to 20, change the mixed numbers into improper

fractions:
3I
7
3- = j3 + —
J7 .^
-j|-
+
II
22
7
1. 4I
3
3. ■A 4 7. 9. 3^
3
oo|o^
00
2. 4.
0
4 8; 4^ 11; 4
Fractions: Addition and Subtraction
11. 13. 3^
■^5 21; 81 IZ; '1% 21;
12. 2| 14. 4I m 10^ 21; <^1 12;
THE MEANING OF 15^4
15-h4 means “how many fours are there in 15?”.
There are 3 fours in 15 with 3 left over, so 15-^4 = 3, remainder 3.
Now that remainder, 3, is \ of 4. Thus we can say that there are 3

fours in 15
i.e. 15 -H 4 =
But
Therefore 15h-4 and ^ mean the same thing
EXERCISE 3m Calculate the following divisions, giving your answers as mixed

numbers:
27-h8 •
27
27h-8 = 8
= 3^
■^8
5. 82h-5 9. 98-1-12
1. 36^7
59^6 6. 29-t-4 10. 107-r 10
2.
7. 41^3 11. 37-1-5
3. 52^11
8. 64-1-9 12. 52-1-8
00
0
4.
•1-
ADDING MIXED NUMBERS
If we want to find the value of 2j + we add the whole numbers

and then the fractions, i.e.
+ 3^ = 2 + 3+ i + ^
5 + 4+3
12
= 5 + 3^
Sometimes there is an extra step in the calculation. For example
3^ + 2| + 5i=3 + 2 + 5 + l+ |+ i
= 10+4^t3+^
= 10 + 1
But I is an improper fraction, so we change it into a mixed number
i.e. 32 + 2^ + 5^ - 10 + ® + l
= 10 + 1 + i
EXERCISE 3n Find
1. 2-+ 3-
2. 1- + 2- 7. 3-+ 1-
2 ^^3 4^5
3. £. 2- + 1 —
'•i+'l 7 ^ ' 14
4. 51 + 41 9;
9^ 3
5. 3 —+ 2—
la
10; 8l+5f
MATHPMATTrq
11. 7-+ 3— 1£. 2—+ 9I

10 ^^5
1I + 4JL
(P)
12. 17; 5—+ 2-

4 + ^12 -^10 ^^5
ST
3f+7i 92
13. 18.
3 ^6
14. 1£. 2—+ 7—

4+Ire ^5^10
15. 6—+ 4-
°1 0 ^^5
£L li + 3f+6j^ 26; 4| + 8i + 2l
22. 5i + 4^+7|^ 27. ^10 3"9lOO 3“ 1
23; 3j + 53- + 8j^ 28;
24. 101+31 + 7^ 29; ly+ l4+9j^

3 ^ 6 ^ 9
25; 4-4-9—+ 1- 10^+

5 ^^15 ^ 3
SUBTRACTING MIXED NUMBERS
If we want to find the value of 5f — 2f we can use the same method

as for adding:
5^ 2
A 1+ ^ 5
3 + 15-8
20
1_
= 3 + 20
But when we find the value of 6^ — 2f we get
6i-2f=6-2 + i- 4
5
= 4 + ^
^4 5
This time it is not so easy to deal with the fractions because | is

bigger than So we take one of the whole units and change it into a
fraction, giving
4
3 + 1 + i - 5
T , 20+5-16
^ 20
EXERCISE 3p Find;
1. 2^-1^ 2— 9; 4—— 3—
^4- *8 ^5 10
2. 3^-1^ 1^ 6^-3^
3 5 1- 3|- °7 5
l5_ 2 7. 2f- 3—— li

3. ‘6 3 >i IL 3 5
4i_ 2-
4. ■^4
_2—
^2 ^2
12; 5i-4
13. 8f-5i 17; 11: 8f-5j
14. 18; 4|- 22; 3^-1^

5^-3^
jg J7 ■i ^2 ‘8
45_ii 23; 2i_l3

15. 1^ 7—-
'7 2 4
^8 3
24; 5^-3^
16. 6—— 3—
04 J7 20; "I — 2-
^3
9 J7_c4
25. 3l_ i2 29; ■ 7- 33;
■’4 8 "f- '9 ^10 ^5
26. 5- — 2— 30; ■ 2- 34; 2^-1^

^^12 ‘4
^5 10 “1 ^3
35; 47 _3ll
27. o2_6i 31; -3^
^10 °5 of- ^6 ^9 18
^3 0 4- .47 36; 5—— 2—

CM
00
32; -^3 7
^10 ^5 ’1- 8
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 3q 1. Calculate;
a)j+y t)) I - I c)|+^ “ ^3
2. Simplify;
a) S b) 3^
3. Write the first quantity as a fraction of the second quantity;
a) 3 days; 1 week b) 17 children; 30 children
Write the following fractions in ascending size order;

1 JL 3 13 7 5 2 _
3 7 17 71
2' 10’ 5’ 20 b)i, 5’
5. Write either > or < between the following pairs of fractions;

7 7 c) ^ 19
ai \2
^
16 b)l
8 24 22 33
6. A cricket club consists of 7 good batsmen, 5 good bowlers, 4 all-

rounders and some non-players. If there are 22 people in the club,
what fraction of them are
a) non-players b) good batsmen c) not all-rounders?
EXERCISE 3r 1. Calculate:
O
a)f-i
1
d) 21 + 41 e) 3i - 2f f) 5l - 2f
2. Simplify:
at M b)
96 ‘=)|t
3. Write the first quantity as a fraction of the second quantity:

a) 13p; £1 b) 233 days; 1 leap year
4. Write either < or > between the following pairs of fractions:

7 1 1 7
a) U.
20 15 1 8 8
5. Write the following fractions in ascending size order:

a'»JL32J_ p'i_9_3517
20 ’ 8 ’ 5 ’ 1 0 5 ’ 15 ’ 10’ 2 6 ’ 4 ’ 8 ’ 32
6 . In a class of 28 children, 13 live in houses with gardens, 7 live in

houses without gardens and the rest live in flats. What fraction of
the children
a) do not live in houses with gardens
b) live in flats?
EXERCISE is 1. Calculate:
at 6 , 1 _ 3 bt 3 , 4_2
^''7+5 4 5 ^ 9 3
d)2i-li + 2l e) 4\-5^+ 1 f)6i-2f+l^
2. Simplify:
/
ooloo
b) 2if c) ^
32
3. Write either > or < between the following pairs of fractions:

5
a) f tT b) f 6
4. Arrange the following fractions is ascending size order:

1 1 ht 1 5 1 2
/ a)i 2’ 6 '' 2 ’ 6 ’ 9 ’ 3
a) 7 minutes; 1 hour b) 1200 people; 3600 people
c) 76p; £1.58
6. In a bag of potatoes there are 6 large ones, 11 small ones and

2 rotten ones. What fraction of the potatoes in the bag are
a) good ones b) not large ones?
EXERCISE 3t 1. Calculate:
3 M 7 , 3_17 ct 114-1 _ 2—
a)f+f- 10 8 ^,5 20 ^^*3^6 12
d) 3i-2i+a e) 2l-3i+l| n 6^ — 4^+ 1^
2. Simplify:
108
a) 4 12 b) c) 42
32 240

a) 5 hours; 24 hours b) 6 seconds; 1 minute c) 5 months; 1 year
4. Write either > or < between the following pairs of fractions:
1 5
a) 10 9 7
5. Arrange the following fractions in ascending size order:
5 1 13 23 1 3
11’ 2 ’ 22 ’ 44 9’ 4’ 1 2
6. A vase of flowers contains 5 pink ones, 3 red ones and 7 white

ones. What fraction of the flowers in the vase are
a) red b) not white c) pink?
FRACTIONS:
MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION
MULTIPLYING FRACTIONS
When fractions are multiplied the result is given by multiplying

together the numbers in the numerator and also multiplying together
the numbers in the denominator. For example
1 1 1x1
- X - = -
2 3 2x3
_ 1
~ 6
If we look at a cake diagram we can see that j of j of the cake is ^
of the cake.
We see that “of” means “multiplied by”.
EXERCISE 4a Draw cake diagrams to show that:
1 1 1 2 1 2
1. — X — = — 4. X - =
2 4 8 3 3 9
1 1 1 1 2 2
2. X = _
5. X - =
3 2 6 3 5 Is
1 3 3 1 1 1
3. X X- = — 6. X - =
2 4 8 4 3 12
59
SIMPLIFYING -
Sometimes we can simplify a product by cancelling the common

factors. For example
2 3 _ 1 X 1
3 "" 4 “
_ 1
“ 2
The diagram shows that
2 3 1
3°^4 = 2
EXERCISE 4b Find;
2 1 3 2 3 1
- X - 7. - X - 11. - X -
5 3 7 5 4 5
1 7 2 3 1 3
- X - 8. - X- 12. - X -
2 8 5 5 7 5
7 4 21 11
13. - X — 15. — X — 17. -X —
8 21 22 27 - 9 21
3 16 8 33 3 5
14. - X — 16. - X — 18. -X-
4 21 9 44 - 4 7
Fractions: Mu/tip/ication and Division 61
4 15 4 25 3 28
- X — 21. - X — 23; - X —
5 16 15 64 7 33
10 33 2 33 48 5
- X — 22. - X — 24. — X —
11 35 3 40 55 12
3 15 4
- X — X -
5 16 7
3 _ 3x3x1
7 1x4x7
3 5 14 3 5 6 6 4 10
25. - X - X 29; - •X - X - 33. - X - X —
7 9 Is 10 9 7 5 3 4
11 30 7 5 3 21 9 1 4
26. X — X — 30. - X — X' - 34. - X - X —
21 31 55 7 8 30 — 8 3 27
15 8 4 1 7 18 7 9
27. X - X - 31. - X X — 35. — X — X ;
16 9 5 2 12 35 —
16 11
5 8 3 7 8 33 5 21
28. — X - 36. — X ■
- X
6 'Ts' 4
< -
H; 11 9 28 14 25
MULTIPLYING MIXED NUMBERS
Suppose that we want to find the value of x ^ x Ij.
We cannot multiply mixed numbers together unless we change them

into improper fractions first. So we change 2j into J and we change
Ij into f. Then we can use the same method as before.
EXERCISE 4c
Find 2jX^x 1 j
9 1_ y 5 1 T _ X ^ X^
^3 21 ^
Find:
1. l^x ^
^25 i-
l-!-x^
‘4X5
2. 2—
^2
X —
5 T. 23-X ^
^3 8
3. ^ IT I- 3-0x2^
11^5
4. i- 3^x4|
5. "^5 22
10; 43-X -4^
^4X21
11. 11: 4— X 2—
12. X 1 12; 63-xlf
13. 4x3| 11; 5lxl^
14. 2— X 7—
11; 8|-x2f
15. 6T_ lT_

0
X
*21 21; 16lx3i
21^ 52 12 X -2_ 26; 73- X l3- X —

°5 *8 1 2 2 T 10
22; 2f x4f X ll 22; 3^x2ix ij
IL 3y X 1 j X 1^
21; 4ixlix2l
24; X X 3^ 21; 4^1Tx2i^
4fxlj^x3j 30; ’r
WHOLE NUMBERS AS FRACTIONS
A whole number can be written as a fraction with a denominator

of 1. For instance 6 = f.
Doing this makes it easier to multiply a whole number by a fraction

or a mixed number.
Fractions: Multiplication and Division 63
EXERCISE 4d Find:
6x7l
= 44
1. 5x4| 5. 18 X 6^ 9. 5^x21
2. 2ix 14 6. 4x3| 10. 3x6^
3. 3lx4 7. 3}xl0 11. iJxS
4. 8. 12.
oo
4l X 9 2lx3
X
o
FRACTIONS OF QUANTITIES
EXERCISE 4e
Find three fifths of 95 metres.
3
T“
f of 95 metres is 57 metres.
Find three quarters of £1.
£1 = 100 pence
I of £1 is 75 pence.
Find:
1 1
1. 3 of 18 6. 4 of 24
1 1
2. 5 of 30 7. 6 of 30
1 1
3. 7 of 21 8 of 64
2 5
4. 3 of 24 6 of 36
i-
5 3
5. 7 of 14 10. 8 of 40
11. f of 20 metres 11- f of 18 metres
12. f of 45 dollars 17. f of 16 dollars
13. of 50 litres 11: } of 63 litres
14. 1 of 88 miles 19. y of 35 miles
15. of 48 gallons 20; of 121 gallons
21. } of £2 11: f of 1 day (24 hours)
22. 5 of 36 pence 27. y of 1 week
23. TOoffl 11: jof £9
24. y of 42 pence 11: f of£l
25. f of 1 year (365 days) 30. ^ of 1 day (24 hours)
DIVIDING BY FRACTIONS
When we divide 6 by 3 we are finding how many threes there are in 6

and we say 64-3 = 2.
In the same way, when we divide 10 by j we are finding how many

halves there are in 10; we know that there are 20, so we say
10-} = 20.
But we also know that 10x2 = 20 so
10 10 2
and — X - 20
T
This example shows that }^4-} = t^x}.
To divide by a fraction we turn that fraction upside down and

multiply.
EXERCISE 4f
How many thirds are there in 5?
5 3
- X -
= 15
There are 15 thirds in 5.
Find the value of 36 4.

12.
36 3 ^4
T"4 "
48
T
48
Divide ^ by f.
7 _^5 _ 7 ^
16‘^8 ~
_ 7
~ To
1. How many js are there in 7?
2. How many are there in 5?
3. How many times does 7 go into 3?
4. How many 3 s are there in 9?
5. How many times does f go into 8?
Find:
4
6. 10; 28." 14. 44^
5 15 9
9
7. 11- 27
7 6 I3
4
8. 40 H-- 12. 14.Z 16. 36
9 8 7
8 5 17
9. 13.
“17“.
72-h — 35-H- 34^
11 7 19
21 7 3 9 8 4
IS)
p
18. 22.
8 14 75 15
9 3 21 7 35 5
19. 23.
To 22^ IT 42 6
28 _ 4 15 5 8 4
24. 26; 28.
9 26" TI 7
22 _ 11 49 7 9 12
25. 27. 29.
■ 45"^ 15 To 26 13
DIVIDING BY WHOLE NUMBERS AND MIXED NUMBERS
If we want to divide 3 by 5 we can say
3 1
- X -
_ 3
“ 5
So 3-^5 is the same as j.
Division with mixed numbers can be done as long as all the mixed
numbers are first changed into improper fractions. For example if we
want to divide 3g- by 8| we first change 3j into ^ and 8| into
Then we can use the same method as before.
EXERCISE 4g
Write 7 divided by 11 as a fraction.
7-11
/ . 11 = —
j j
Find the value of 3j= 8|.
t.L^ si _ 21^ 31
•^8 • °4 “ 8 • 4
_
15 ,
~ 14
Find:
■ ■
r4 . 14 42
1.
^9 27 i- 7 14
2. ^8 ■ -^4 7.
-‘s ■ ”4
o^
3. 7—— 1 —
'5 ‘20 1-
4. Divide 8g: by l|
1- Divide 5|: by 2-
5. Divide 6j by 2| 10; Divide 7y by 1-
11. IqI—
IU3 . iT.
Ig 1£.
12. o4 . T 3 17. 12l4 8i

^5 • -^10
H- Divide 11^ by ff 18. Divide lOf by 3;
1£. Divide 9y by 1^ 11- Divide 8| by 5^
311^5! 20; ZZ3 . 1^

22^- Ig
11- ^‘2 • ■‘8
MIXED MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION
Suppose we want to find the value of an expression like 2^ x ly.

Two things need to be done;
Step one—If there are any mixed numbers, change them into
improper fractions.
Step two—Turn the fraction after the -h sign upside down and
change into x.
Then
(Step one)
= (Step two)
_ 3
“ 8
EXERCISE 4h Find:
al X 13_— ?!
^3 *8 • “^4
4ix ll^2i - 13 „ 9 . 9
^3 ^'8 - ^4“ 3 ^8 4
X
II
13
~ 6
= 2-
. 15 2 27
1. ^x
8 ^
X
^X 9.18
16 5 10' 40 5 ^ 11-55
2. 2|-x 1 . 1 1 ^x2l- 21 1£. lx 11.22

4 6 ■ 12 4 ^ ^3 • 32 12 ■ 27
. 12 8
3. ^x 7. 3^x 11. lx 2 . 8
3 d • 25 ■^5 5- 1 5 7 5 • 21
4. 4x 8 . 16 ^x 21-^ 10 14 X 5 . 7
7 ^ 9 ■ 21 i- 7 X Z2 . 21 H: 25 9-18
MIXED OPERATIONS
When brackets are placed round a pair of fractions it means that we

have to work out what is inside the brackets before doing anything
else. For example
3 5
- X -
_ 15
If we meet an expression in which , x and occur, we need to

know the order in which to do the calculations. We use the same rule
for fractions as we used for whole numbers, that is
Brackets first, then Multiply and Divide, then Add and Subtract.
You may remember this order from the phrase

“Bless My Dear Aunt Sally”.
EXERCISE 4i Calculate:
J-('lx'f)
1 7
\ / 1 ^
_ 7 . 7
(brackets)
~ 8 • 3
- 3 (divide)
~ 8
3
~ 8
2/1 1 \ . 1
3 U 12j • 2
2 xH 1 \ . 1 2 ^ /3-1 \ . 1
3 (4 12j • 2 “ 3 [ 12 j ■ 2
- 2 . 1
(brackets)
“3 12 • 2
-2r\. 2 (multiply and
- 12^ 1 divide)
2
9
(multiply)
_ 4_3 + 1 (add and

“ To subtract)
_
_ 1
“ 5
11. 11; 111+i)
f’‘(i + f) IL (f
11; Mi+i) 11;
Ifb 11;
11; 20;
1 (2
2L 6 V3 2} ' 12 11-
22; 27. lJ_x 23^f3 , n

10 24 • U ^ 6;
23; 28; 2^--^xfl-l^

5 10 V? 3)
1 3 6 1 5 , 13 , 4\ , 3
24; *11 7 ^ ‘9 33 11; 9 . 1^13 + 9j7- g
5 xfi _ |_9_ ll , /5 _ 3^4n

11; 8 1,9 ej 16
30. ‘9+U 4 • ^2)
State whether each of the following statements is true or false:

3 1 ^ 2 _ 1 ^ 2
IL
ix1+1- i+i
23'3 3~3
36. 4 2 3“4 3
2 1,1 2,1 1
32; lx 1+1- lx 1
3^4+4“3^* IL 3 4"'"2“3"'‘2 4
1 . 3 , 1 _ 1 , 1 38. 3x2,1 _ 3 , 2
33. 4‘4"'"2“3'’'2 5X3+2^5^23
4 1.1 /4 1\ . 1
34; i+lx1- 1+1
3^34“3^6 7 4 ■ 3 “ 1,7 4j • 3
1,1 . 1 _ 3 ^ 2 3.1 1 3 y 4 1
11; 2 + 4 ■ 2 ~ 4 ^ 1 11; 8 • 4 4 “ 8 1 4
EXERCISE 4j In this exercise you will find + , — , x and -h . Read the question
carefully and then decide which method to use. Find:
1. 1I + 3I 4lxl
^2 ^-^4 1; ^4X9
2. 7. 3I-I
■^3 • 6
3. ■M 1; 2I - ll
5 *3
4. liî 9; Slx-^
^2• 8 ^2 11
5. 7+2
10. l^ + 2l
^8^ 2
Fractions: Multiplication and'Division
11. 1£. 2—— 3—

2^4 6 ■ ^3
12. 17. 1- + 2i
^3 13 7 ^^2
13. 3— — 2— 2^ - 1^
■^5 '^10 11; ■^4 ‘8
14. 3-- 1- 2^+1^

■^7 • ^8 11; ^8 + M6
15. 4ix i 20;

4 6
21. li+2 _ 5 26; 4- — 5—+ 2—

4^3 6 ^2 ■^4^^8
2i _ 2 li
OJ
_
22. 27.
o|
2 3 4
23. 3i+ ii+5 21; 5^ - l| - 2^

■^2 ^ *4 ^ 8 2 4 4
24. 2i+ll - 3 29; 3i + 2l- ^

3^2 4 7^^2 14
25. aJ_sT_l 2^ 30. si T _ 4I

2 4 4
1 — A- 2— X — 36. 2— — 1-i- X 1 —
?L ‘ 2 ^ ^^3 ^4 ^8 ‘5*3
32; 37; il ^42 _

2j X 1 2 — 2^ ‘4 • ^3 16
4l^2^+i 38; 2— X
Z7 X ^4
3——. 1.^
1g
H; 3 6^4
-,2 6.5 39. 1- + 2- — 1 —
M: 7-14 '2+‘^7 *14
40; 3 X 1 1 3
35. 1—
*8
X —
9
— 2—
2 5 4' 8
PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 4k
If Jane can iron a shirt in 4^ minutes, how long will it take
her to iron 10 shirts?
•a
Time to iron 1 shirt = 4^ minutes
-a
Time to iron 10 shirts = 4^ x 10 minutes
= ^ X ^ minutes
9*5
= minutes
= 47^ minutes
1. A bag of flour weighs kilograms. What is the weight of 20

bags?
2. A cook adds 3j cups of water to a stew. If the cup holds 3^ of

a litre how many litres of water were added?
3. My journey to school starts with a walk of ykm to the bus stop,

then a bus ride of km followed by a walk of ^km. How
long is my journey to school?
4. It takes 3^ minutes for a cub scout to clean a pair of shoes. If he

cleans 18 pairs of shoes to raise money for a charity, how long
does he spend on the job?
5. A burger bar chef cooks some beefburgers and piles them one on
top of the other. If each burger is 97 mm thick and the pile is
209 mm high, how many did he cook?
6. If you read 30 pages of a book in f of an hour, how many

minutes does it take to read each page?
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 41 1. Calculate
2. Find how many times 2j goes into 13j.
3. What is 5 of
4. Find 1+ li
5. Arrange the following fractions in ascending order of size:

7 3 2
10 ’ 5 > 3■
6. Find:
a)4ix4| b)3|--t-2i
7. What is I of I added to Ij?
8. Find (^l| + x 1^.
9. What is f of 1 hour 3 minutes (in minutes)?
10. Find 7i-4i-li
11. Fill in the missing numbers:

a'l 7 _ li M iO - _
a) 9 - 1 1 - 44
12. Express as mixed numbers:

a) M b) ^ c) ^
11; State whether the following statements are true or false:
TT > TO b) ^ of 5 = ^ X c) 2^ =
1£. A handyman takes !§■ minutes to lay one brick. How long will
it take him to lay 56 bricks?
15. A pharmacist counts 48 tablets and puts them in a bottle. Each

tablet weighs j of a gram and the weight of the empty bottle is
112j grams. What is the total weight?
EXERCISE 4m 1. Find:
a)4ix3l b)3f-^
2. Find:
3. Put > or < between the following pairs of numbers:

at —
at 7 —
g ht
o; —
9 11 ^
jQ
4. Calculate:
a) Osi_
4
12^2
13-5 •>)3|x(83-5f)
5. Arrange in ascending order: jj, f.
6. What is Ij subtracted from f of 5^:?
7. Find:
a)4ix3f-l0i b)3i-(2|-|)
8. What is if of 1 minute 15 seconds (in seconds)?
9. Fill in the missing numbers:
^)f=30 b)f=^
10 . Express as mixed numbers:

a) ¥ b) ^ c) ^
11. A car travels 5fkm north, then 2fkm west and finally 4|km
north. What is the total distance travelled (in kilometres)? What
fraction of the journey was travelled in a northerly direction?
12 . A man can paint a door in 1 hour 15 minutes. How many

similar doors can he paint in 7f hours ?
EXERCISE 4n f. Find:
2 . Find:
, b) 2^ X ^
3. What is f of the number of days in June?
4. Arrange in descending order: ff,
5/ Calculate:
a)4ix3|-10l b)3i + 5l-|
6 . Which is smaller it or f ?
i. Find 3i%T(3|-lf).
8 . What is f of 4f divided by if?
9'. Express as mixed numbers:

a)^ b)f c)l^
10. Which of the following statements are true?

a)3j^l=3^xl b) i X + i-j = half of I
c)l + i^2 = |
11 ■ It takes 1 j minutes to wrap a parcel and a half a minute to

address it. How long does it take to wrap and address 8 similar
I parcels'?
1,2. My bag contains 2 books each of weight j kg and 3 folders

each of weight ^kg. What is the total weight in my bag?
What fraction of the total weight is books?
5 _
INTRODUCTION TO DECIMALS
THE MEANING OF DECIMALS __
Consider the number 426. The position of the figures indicates what
each figure represents. We can write:
hundreds tens units
4 2 6
Each quantity in the heading is of the quantity to its left: ten is

of a hundred, a unit is of ten. Moving further to the right we
can have further headings: tenths of a unit, hundredths of a unit and
so on (a hundredth of a unit is of a tenth of a unit). For example:
tens units tenths hundredths
16.0 2
To mark where the units come we put a point after the units position.
16.02 is 1 ten, 6 units and 2 hundredths or
units tenths hundredths thousandths
0.0 0 4
0.004 is 4 thousandths or , (foo • this case, 0 is written before the

point to help make it clear where the point comes.
EXERCISE 5a Write the following numbers in headed columns:
tens units tenths hundredths i
34.62 = 3 4 6 2 -
i
units tenths hundredths thousandths ten-thousandths
0.0207 = 0 . 0 2 0 7
1. 2.6 5. 101.3 9. 6.34
2. 32.1 6. 0.00007 10. 0.604
3. 6.03 7. 1.046 11. 15.045
4. 0.09 8. 12.001 12. 0.0092
76
introduction to Decimals 77
CHANGING DECIMALS TO FRACTIONS
EXERCISE 5b Write the following decimals as fractions in their lowest terms (using
mixed numbers where necessary):
0.6
units tenths
0.6 = 0 . 6
6
10
3
5
12.04
tens units tenths hundredths

12.04 = 1 2 . 0 4 == 12
100
== 12—
‘^25
1. 0.2 5. 0.001 9. 1.8
2. 0.06 6. 6.4 10. 1.7

3. 1.3 7. 0.7 11. 15.5
4. 0.0007 8. 2.01 12. 8.06
0.21
units tenths hundredths

2 1
0.21 = 0 . . 2 1 =
10 ^ 100
20 + 1
1 00
21
100
0.403
o
0.403 0 3
II
= 4,3
10 ^ 1000
400+3
1000
_ 403
1000
You can go straight from the decimal to one fraction.
0.302

0.302 = 0 .. 3 0 2 302
1000
151
500
Write as fractions:
13. 0.73 17. 0.00067 21. 0.0207

14. 0.081 18. 0.17 22. 0.63
15. 0.207 19. 0.071 23. 0.031
16. 0.0029 20. 0.3001 24. 0.47
Write as fractions in their lowest terms;

25. 0.25 29. 0.15 33. 0.044
26. 0.072 30. 0.025 34. 0.125
27. 0.38 31. 0.35 35. 0.48
28. 0.0305 32. 0.0016 36. 0.625
Introduction to Decimals 79
CHANGING FRACTIONS TO DECIMALS
EXERCISE 5c Write the following numbers as decimals:
1
10
units tenths
7
= 0 . 7
10
3 3
•^100
units tenths hundredths
3 3 = 3 . 0 3
100
o 00
1. 4
100
5. 9.
o
10
2. 9 6
10
6. 2 ®
100 10. 10 000
3. 4
‘A 7. 100 11. 4 3
^1000
2
4. 1000
8. 7—
MO
12. 29
10 000
ADDITION OF DECIMALS
To add decimals we add in the usual way.
tens units tenths
4.2+13.1 = 17.3 4 2 2 tenths + 1 tenth

+ 1 3 1 = 3 tenths
1 7 . 3
5.3 + 6.8 = 12.1 5 3 3 tenths+ 8 tenths

+ 6 . 8 = 11 tenths
1 2 . 1 = 1 unit and 1 tei
I f
The headings above the figures need not be written as long as we

know what they are and the decimal points are in line (including the
invisible point after a whole number, e.g. 4 = 4.0).
EXERCISE 5d Find:
32.6+1.7
32.6
+ 1.7
34.3
32.6+1.7 = 34.3 (
3+ 1.6 + 0.032 + 2.0066

3
1.6
0.032
3+ 1.6 + 0.032 + 2.0066 = 6.6386 + 2.0066
6.6386
1. 7.2 + 3.6 13.14+0.9
2. 6.21 + 1.34 7. 4 + 3.6
3. 0.013 + 0.026 1 - 9.24 + 3
4. 3.87 + 0.11 9; 3.6 + 0.08
5. 4.6+1.23 10; 7.2 + 0.32+1.6
11. 0.0043 + 0.263 11 - 0.32 + 0.032 + 0.0032
12. 0.002 + 2.1 17; 4.6 + 0.0005
13. 0.00052+0.00124 1^ 16.8 + 3.9
14. 0.068 + 0.003 + 0.06 1.62 + 2.078 + 3.1
15. 4.62 + 0.078 7.34+6+14.034
21. Add 0.68 to 1.7.
22. Find the sum of 3.28 and 14.021.
23. To 7.9 add 4 and 3.72.
24. Evaluate 7.9 + 0.62 + 5.
25. Find the sum of 8.6, 5 and 3.21.

SUBTRACTION OF DECIMALS
EXERCISE 5e Subtraction also may be done in the usual way, making sure that the
decimal points are in line.
Find:
24.2-13.7
24.2
-13.7
10.5
24.2-13.7 = 10.5
1. 6.8-4.3 5. 0.0342-0.0021 9. 102.6-31.2
2. 9.6-1.8 6. 17.23-0.36 10. 7.32-0.67
3. 32.7-14.2 7. 3.273-1.032 11. 54.07-12.62
4. 0.62-0.21 8. 0.262-0.071 12. 7.063-0.124
It may be necessary to add noughts so that there is the same number

of figures after the point in both cases.
4.623-1.7
4.623
-1.700
2.923
4.623-1.7 = 2.923
4.63- 1.0342
4.6300
-1.0342
3.5958
4.63- 1.0342 = 3.5958
2-1.4
2.0
-1.4
2-1.4 = 0.6 0.6
13. 3.26-0.2 1^ 7.98--0.098
14. 3.2-0.26 1^ 7.098 -0.98
15. 14.23-11.1 20; 3.2- 0.428
16. 6.8-4.14 11.2--0.0026
17. 11-8.6 0.00032-0.000123
23. 0.0073-0.0006 28. 6-0.073
24. 0.0073-0.006 29; 7.3-0.06
25. 0.006-0.00073 730-0.6
26. 0.06-0.00073 IL 0.73-0.00006
27. 6-0.73 H; 0.73-0.6
33; Take 19.2 from 76.8. From 0.168 subtract 0.019
34; Subtract 1.9 from 10.2. 36; Evaluate 7.62 — 0.81.
EXERCISE 5f Find the value of:
1. 8.624-1.7 1- 1004-0.28
2. 8.62-1.7 7. 100-0.28
3. 3.8-0.82 1- 0.264-0.026
4. 0.08-f 0.324-6.2 9; 0.26-0.026
5. 5-0.6 10; 78.42-0.8
11. 38.2-Hl.68 1^ 0.02-0.013
12. 38.2-1.68 22; 0.062-H 0.32
13. 0.844-24-200 11; 6.83-0.19
14. 16-h1.6-h0.16 11; 17.2-H 204-1.62
15. 1.4-0.81 20. 9.2-H 13.21-14

Find the perimeter of the triangle (the perimeter is the

distance all round).
2.6 cm
1.6
2.3
Perimeter = 1.6+ 2.3+ 2.6 cm + 2.6
= 6.5 cm 6.5
21. Find the perimeter of the rectangle:
7.1 cm
22. A piece of webbing is 7.6 m long. If 2.3 m is cut off, how much
is left?
23. Find the total bill for three articles costing £5, £6.52 and £13.25.
24. The bill for two books came to £14.24. One book cost £3.72.
What was the cost of the other one?
25. Add 2.32 and 0.68 and subtract the result from 4.
26. Find the perimeter of the quadrilateral: 14.2cm
15 cm
10.1 cm
13.9 cm
27. The bill for three meals was £9. The first meal cost £2.43 and
the second £J.72, What was the cost of the third?
MULTIPLICATION BY 10, 100, 1000,...
Consider 32x 10 = 320. Writing 32 and 320 in headed columns gives
hundreds tens units
3 2
3 2 0
Multiplying hy 10 has made the number of units become the number

of tens, and the number of tens has become the number of hundreds,
so that all the figures have moved one place to the left.
Consider 0.2x10. When multiplied by 10, tenths become units

(i^x 10 = 1), so
units tenths units
0.2 X 10 = 2
Again the figure has moved one place to the left.
Multiplying by 100 means multiplying by 10 and then by 10 again, so

the figures move 2 places to the left.
tens units tenths hundredths thousandths
0 . 4 2 6 X 100
4 2 . 6
Notice that the figures move to the left while the point stays put but
without headings it looks as though the figures stay put and the point
moves to the right.
When necessary we fill in an empty space with a nought.
units tenths hundreds tens units
4 2 X 100 = 4 2 0
EXERCISE 5g Find the value of:
a) 368 x 100 368 X 100 = 36 800
b) 3.68 X 10 3.68 X 10 = 36.8
c) 3.68x 1000 3.68 X 1000 = 3680
1. 72X1000 5. 32.78 X 100 9. 72.81 X 1000
2. 8.24 X 10 6. 0.043 x 10000 10. 0.0000063x 10
3. 0.0024 X 100 7. 0.0602 X 100 11. 0.007 03x 100
4. 46x 10 8. 3.206 X 10 12. 0.0374 X 10000
DIVISION BY 10, 100, 1000,...
When we divide by 10, hundreds become tens and tens become units.
hundreds tens units tens units

6 4 0-h10=6 4
The figures move one place to the right and the number becomes
smaller but it looks as though the decimal point moves to the left so
2.72 -t- 10 = 0.272
To divide by 100 the point is moved two places to the left.
To divide by 1000 the point is moved three places to the left.
EXERCISE 5h Find the value of;
a) 3.2-10 3.2-10 = 0.32
b) 320^10000 320- 10000 = 0.032
1. 277.2-100 5. 27-10 9. 426 H-10000
2. 76.26-10 6. . -
6 8 100 10. 13.4-10
3. 0.00024-10 7. 0.26-10 11. 3.74-1000
12.
o
o
4. 8. 15.8-1000 0.92-100
•1*
EXERCISE 5i Find:
1. 1.64 10 14.2 X 100 140-1000

1-
2. 1.6x10
1- 0.068 X 100 10; 7.8 X 10 000
3. 0.078 X 100 7. 1.63^100 IT 24-100
4. 0.078^100
1- 2-1000 12; 0.063 X 1000
13. 0.32 X 10 17; 11.1 X 1000 21; 0.024-100
14. 7.9-4 100

H; 0.038- 100 22; 0.3-100000
15. 0.000 78 X 100 IS; 0.384 1000 23. 0.0041 X 1000
16. 2.44-10 20. 3.8 X 100 000 24. 0.1004 X 100
25. Share 42 m of string equally amongst 10 people.
26. Find the total cost of 100 articles at £1.52 each.
27. Evaluate 13.84-100 and 13.8x100.
28. Multiply 1.6 by 100 and then divide the result by 1000.
29. Add 16.2 and 1.26 and divide the result by 100.
30. Take 9.6 from 13.4 and divide the result by 1000.
DIVISION BY WHOLE NUMBERS
We can see that
units tenths units tenths
0.6 ^ 1 = 0 . 3
because 6 tenths 2 = 3 tenths. So we may divide by a whole

number in the usual way as long as we keep the figures in the correct
columns and the points are in line.
EXERCISE 5j
Find the value of 6.84-2
2)6.8 (Keep the figures

6.8-2 = 3.4 3.4 and points in line)
Find the value of:
1. 0.4-2 5. 0.9-9 9. 42.6-2
2. 3.2-2 6. 0.95-5 10. 7.53-3
3. 0.63-3 7. 0.672-3 11. 6.56-4
4. 7.8-3 8. 26.6-7 12. 0.75-5
It may sometimes be necessary to fill spaces with noughts.
0.00036-3
3 ) 0.00036
0.00036-3 = 0.00012 0.000 12
0.45^5
5 ) 0.45
0.45-H 5 = 0.09 0.09
6.12-3
3)6.12
6.12-3 = 2.04 2.04
13. 0.057-3 IL 0.012-6

IL 1.232-4
14. 0.00065-5 11: 0.000 36-6 H: 0.6552-6
15. 0.008 72-4 11: 1.62-2

?!: 0.0285 = 5
16. 0.168-4 20; 4.24-4 0.1359-3
25. 0.0076-4 29; 6.3^1 14.749-7
26. 0.81-9 30; 0.0636-6 1.86-3
27. 0.5215 = 5 31. 0.038-2 35; 0.222-6
28. 0.000075-5 4.62-6 6.24-8
It may be necessary to add noughts at the end of a number in order

to finish the division.
2-5
5)2.0
2-5 = 0.4 0.4
88 ST(P) Mathematics iA
2.9-^8
8 ) 2.9030
2.9-8 = 0.3625 0.3625
Find the value of:
37. 6-5 41. 3.6-5 45; 9.1-H2
38. 7.4-4 0.0002-5 46; 0.000 31-t-2
39. 0.83-2 43. 7.1H-8 9.4-4
40. 0.9-6 44. 7^4 48; 0.062-5
49. 0.5-4 53; 13-5 6.83-8
50. 0.31H-8 0.3-6 14.7-6
51. 2.6-5 0.01-4 2.3H-4
52. 7.62-4 56. 3.014-5 60. 0.446 H-8
If we divide 7.8 m of tape equally amongst 5 people, how

long a piece will they each have?
Length of each piece = 7.8-H5m 5)7.80

= 1.56m 1.56
61. The perimeter of a square is 14.6 cm.

What is the length of a side?
62. Divide 32.6 m into 8 equal parts.
63. Share 14.3 kg equally between 2 people.
64. The perimeter of a regular pentagon (a five-sided figure with all

the sides equal) is 16 cm. What is the length of one side?
65. Share £36 equally amongst 8 people.

LONG DIVISION
We can also use long division. The decimal point is used only in the
original number and the answer, and not in the lines of working
below these.
EXERCISE 5k Find the value of;
2.56^16 0.16
16)2.56
2.56-16 = 0.16 16
96
%
—
4.2-25 0.168
25 ) 4.200
4.2-25 = 0.168 25
170
150
200
200
1. 26.4-24 11.22-22 9; 8.48-16
2. 2.1-14
1- 80^25 10. 5.2-20
3. 1.56-13 7. 0.0615-15 11. 7.84- 14
4. 9.45-21 1- 0.864-24
H: 25.2-36
13. 35.52- 111

IZ; 54.4-17
IL 23.4-45
14. 7.28-28 11: 21.93-51 22: 71.76-23
15. 1.296-54 11: 20.79-99

11: 39.48-47
16. 0.008 05-35 20. 0.01426-20 24. 0.2556-45
CHANGING FRACTIONS TO DECIMALS (EXACT VALUES)
We may think of f as 3-^4 and hence write it as a decimal.
EXERCISE 51
Express ^ as a decimal.
4) 3.00
3 = 3^4 = 0.75 0.75
Express the following fractions as decimals:
'25
0.08
1+2 + 25
25 ) 2.00
= 1+0.08 200
= 1.08
1. 1 3. 3 1
7. 5 3
4 5
5. 9.
25 8 25
2. 3 5
6. 24 7 1
00
8
4. 16 10.
16 32
STANDARD DECIMALS AND FRACTIONS
It is worth while knowing a few equivalent fractions and decimals.

For example
1 1
1 = 0.5 = 0.25 0.125
EXERCISE 5m Write the following decimals as fractions in their lowest terms,

without any working if possible:
2 4
(Notice that 5 ~ ~ ^^
1. 0.2 3. 0.8 5. 0.6 7. 0.9

2. 0.3 4. 0.75 6. 0.7 8. 0.05
Write down the following fractions as decimals:
9 5
9. 15.
10 8
1 7
10. 16.
4 loo
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 5n 1. Write 0.02 as a fraction in its lowest terms.
2. Write ^nd decimals.
3. Add together 4.27, 31 and 1.6.

4. Subtract 1.82 from 4.2.
5. Divide 0.082 by 4.
6. Multiply 0.0301 by 100.
7. Express J as a decimal.
9.2 cm
8. Fiird the perimeter of the
quadrilateral:
EXERCISE 5p 1. Give 0.3 as a fraction.
2. Express as a decimal.
3. Find the sum of 16.2, 4.12 and 7.
4. Find the value of 0.062-h 100.
5. Divide 1.5 by 25.
6. Find the total bill for three books costing £4.26, £5 and £1.32.
8. Which is bigger, f or 0.3?
EXERCISE 5q 1. Give 0.008 as a fraction in its lowest terms.
2. Express f as a decimal.
3. Add 14.2, 6, 0.38 and 7.21 together.
4. Subtract 14.96 from 100.
5. Divide 8.6 by 1000.
6. Evaluate 1.5-:-6.
7. Express as a decimal.
8. The perimeter of an equilateral triangle (all

three sides are equal) is 14.4 cm. What is the
length of one side?
EXERCISE 5r 1. Express ^ as a decimal.
2. Find 8.2-1.92.
3. Divide 1.3 by 5.
4. Add 4.2 and 0.28 and subtract 1.5 from the result.
5. Express 0.09 as a fraction.
6. Multiply 0.028 by ten thousand.
7. Divide 42 by 15.
8. I go into a shop with £6.22 and buy two articles, one costing
£1.42 and the other £2.61. How much do I have left?
MULTIPLICATION AND
DIVISION OF DECIMALS
LONG METHOD OF MULTIPLICATION
EXERCISE 6a Calculate the following products:
0.3x0.02
3 2
0.3 X 0.02 = — X-
10 100
6
“ 1000
= 0.006
0.06 X 2
12
= 0.12
1. 0.04 X 0.2 5. 0.001 xO.3 9. 0.08x0.01
2. 0.1 xO.l 6. 0.4x0.0001 10 . 0.0003 x 0.002
3. 0.003 X 6 7. 4x0.06 11. 0.9 X 0.02
4. 3x0.02 8. 0.4x0.0012 12. 0.004 X 2
SHORT METHOD OF MULTIPLICATION
In the examples above, if we add together the number of figures

(including noughts) after the decimal points in the original two
numbers, we get the number of figures after the point in the answer.
The number of figures after the point is called the number of decimal
places. In the first example in Exercise 6a, 0.3 has one decimal place,
0.02 has two decimal places and the answer, 0.006, has three decimal
places, which is the sum of one and two.
93
We can use this fact to work out 0.3 x 0.02 without using fractions.
Multiply 3 by 2 ignoring the points; count up the number of decimal
places after the points and then put the point in the correct position
in the answer, writing in noughts where necessary, i.e. 0.3 x 0.02=0.006.
Any noughts that come after the point must be included when
counting the decimal places.
EXERCISE 6b Calculate the following products;
0.08x0.4
0.08 X 0.4 = 0.032 8x4 = 32

(2 places) (1 place) (3 places)
6 X 0.002
6 X 0.002 = 0.012 6x2 = 12

(0 places) (3 places) (3 places)
1. 0.6 0.3
1
X
-
0.12x0.09
1-
0.08 X 0.08
2. 0.04 X 0.06 0.07 X 0.0003 10; 3 X 0.0006
3. 0.009 2 7.
X 0.5x0.07
11-
0.7x0.06
4. 0.07 X 0.008 8x0.6 9 0.08

I- I!- X
13. 0.07 X 12 0.9x9 7x0.011

li: Il¬
14. 4 X 0.009 16. 0.0008 X 11 ls. 0.04 X 7
Noughts appearing in the multiplication in the middle or at the right-

hand end must also be considered when counting the places.
0.252x0.4
0.252 X 0.4 = 0.1008 252

(3 places) (1 place) (4 places) X 4
1008
2.5x6
2.5 X 6 = 15.0 25
(1 place) (0 places) (1 place) X 6
150
Multiplication and Division of Decimals 95
300x0.2
300 X 0.2 = 60.0 300 X 2 = 600

(0 places) (1 place) (1 place)
Calculate the following products:
19. 0.751 X 0.2 23. 400 X 0.6 27. 320 X 0.07
20. 3.2 X 0.5 31.5x2 0.4 X 0.0055

21. 0.35x4 25; 5.6x0.02 0.5x0.06
22. 1.52x0.0006 26. 0.008 X 256 0.04x0.352
31. 1.6 X 0.4 35; 4x 1.6 0.16x4

32. 1.6 X 0.5 5x0.016 40; 0.0016x5
33. 160x0.004 0.000 04x0.00016 41. 0.072 X 0.6
34. 0.16x0.005 38. 16000x0.05 42. 310x0.04
MULTIPLICATION
EXERCISE 6c Calculate the following products:
0.26 x 1.3
26
0.26 X 1.3 = 0.338 X 13
(2 places) (1 place) (3 places)
78
260
338
1. 4.2 X 1.6 310x 1.4 9; 17.8x420

2. 52 X 0.24
i- 1.68x0.27 10; 3.2x37
3. 0.68x0.14 T. 13.2x2.5
IL 39x0.23
4. 48.2x26 8. 0.0082 X 0.034
H; 0.264 x 750
13. 14.4x4.5 17; 0.16x 16

IL 14x0.123
14. 1.36x0.082
11; 0.0016 X 1600 22; 1.9x9.1
15. 0.081 x 0.032 1£. 0.28x0.28

M: 8.2 X 2.8
16. 1.6x 1.6 20. 0.34x0.31 24. 0.047 X 0.66

PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 6d
Find the cost of 6 books at £2.35 each.
Cost = £2.35 X 6 235

X 6
= £14.10
1410
1. Find the cost of 10 articles at £32.50 each.
2. The perimeter of a square is 17.6 cm. Find the length of one side
“ of the square.
3. Divide 26.6 kg into 7 equal parts.
4. Find the perimeter of a square of side 4.2 cm.
5. Find the cost of 62 notebooks at 68 p each, first in pence and

“ then in pounds.
6. Multiply 3.2 by 0.6 and divide the result by 8.
7. If 68.25 m of ribbon is divided into 21 equal pieces, how long is

each piece?
8. The length of a side of a regular

twelve-sided polygon (a shape with
12 equal sides) is 4.2 m. Find the
perimeter of the polygon.
RECURRING DECIMALS
Consider the calculation
3 - 4 = 0.75 4) 3.00
0.75
By adding two noughts after the point we are able to finish the
division and give an exact answer. Now consider
2 -H 3 = 0.666 ... 3 ) 2.0000 .. .

0.6666 . . .
We can see that we will continue to obtain 6s for ever and we say
that the 6 recurs.
Consider
31 H- 11 = 2.8181 11 ) 31.0000 . . .
2.8181 . . .
Here 81 recurs.
Sometimes it is one figure which is repeated and sometimes it is a

group of figures. If one figure or a group continues to recur we have a
recurring decimal.
EXERCISE 6e Calculate:
0.2 = 7
1 ) 0.200000000000...
0.2 = 7 = 0.028 571 428 571... 0.028 571 428 571...
1. 1.4 = 6 4=7 0.03 = 7
2. 0.03=11 4. 0.43 = 3 1.1=9
Express the following fractions as decimals:
4
3
4 3 ) 4.00 . . .
- = 4 = 3 = 1.333 . . .
1.33 . . .
7. 1
9
9.
=11
1
\
2 5
i- 3 m 7
To save writing so many figures we use a dot notation for recurring

decimals.
For example
1=1-6 = 0.1666... 6) 1.000. . .
= 0.16 •••
and 0.2=7 = 0.028 5714 l\^_

0.028 571428 571428
The dots are placed over the single recurring number or over the first
and last figures of the recurring group.
13. Write the answers 1 to 12 above using the dot notation.

CORRECTING TO A GIVEN NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES
Often we need to know only the first few figures of a decimal. For
instance, if we measure a length with an ordinary ruler we usually
need an answer to the nearest i^cm and are not interested, or cannot
see, how many r^cm are involved.
1—1—r n ^ ^ n
_ <N
_ CO
1 4.1
4 cm 4.5 5 cm \
L”
Look at this enlarged view of the end of a line which is being

measured. We can see that with a more accurate measure we might be
able to give the length as 4.34 cm. However on the given ruler we
would probably measure it as 4.3 cm because we can see that the end
of the line is nearer 4.3 than 4.4. We cannot give the exact length of
the line but we can say that it is 4.3 cm long to the nearest i^cm. We
write this as 4.3 cm correct to 1 decimal place.
Consider the numbers 0.62, 0.622, 0.625, 0.627 and 0.63. To compare
them we write 0.62 as 0.620 and 0.63 as 0.630 so that each number
has 3 figures after the point. When we write them in order in a
column:
0.620
0.622
0.625
0.627
0.630
we can see that 0.622 is nearer to 0.620 than to 0.630 while 0.627 is
nearer to 0.630 so we write
0.6212 = 0.62 (correct to 2 decimal places)
0.62'7 = 0.63 (correct to 2 decimal places)
It is not so obvious what to do with 0.625 as it is halfway between

0.62 and 0.63. To save arguments, if the figure after the cut-off line is
5 or more we add 1 to the figure before the cut-off line, i.e. we round
the number up, so we write
0.62i5 = 0.63 (correct to 2 decimal places)

EXERCISE 6f
Give 10.9315 correct to:
a) the nearest whole number b) 1 decimal place
c) 3 decimal places.
I
a) 10,.9315 = 11 (correct to the nearest whole number)
b) 10.9|315 = 10.9 (correct to 1 decimal place)
c) 10.93115 = 10.932 (correct to 3 decimal places)
Give 4.699 and 0.007 correet to 2 decimal places.
4.69|9 = 4.70 (correct to 2 decimal places)
0.00]7 = 0.01 (correct to 2 decimal places)
Give the following numbers correct to 2 decimal places:
1. 0.328 6. 0.6947
2. 0.322 7. 0.8351
3. 1.2671
h 3.927
4. 2.345 9; 0.0084
5. 0.0416 10. 3.9999
Give the following numbers correct to the nearest whole number:
11. 13.9 1£. 6.783
12. 6.34 17. 109.7
13. 26.5
21- 6.145
14. 2.78
21; 74.09
15. 4.45 20. 3.9999
Give the following numbers correct to 3 decimal places:
21. 0.3627 26; 0.0843
22. 0.026234 27. 0.08447
23. 0.007 14 28. 0.3251
24. 0.0695 29; 0.032 51
25. 0.00098 30. 3.9999

Give the following numbers correct to the number of decimal places

indicated in the brackets:
31. 1.784 (1) 36. 1.639 (2)
32. 42.64 (1) 37. 1.639 (1)

33. 1.0092 (2) 38. 1.689 (nearest whole number)
34. 0.00942 (4) 39. 3.4984 (2)
35. 0.7345 (3) 40. 3.4984 (1)
If we are asked to give an answer correct to a certain number of

decimal places, we work out one more decimal place than is asked
for. Then we can find the size of the last figure required.
EXERCISE 6g
Find 4.28 6 giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places.
4.28-^6 = 0.7113... 6 ) 4.28^0
= 0.71 (correct to 2 decimal places) 0.713...
Calculate 302-h 14 correct to 1 decimal place.
1 21.57 . . .
302 H-14 = 21.517 . . . 14 ) 302.00
28
= 21.6 (correct to 1 decimal place)
22
14
80
70
100
98
Calculate, giving your answers correct to 2 decimal places:
1. 0.496=3 5. 25.68 = 9 9. 5.68 = 24
2. 6.49-t-7 i- 2.35=15 10; 3.85 = 101
3. 3.12 = 9 7. 0.68=16
IL 1.73 = 8
4. 12.2 = 6 8. 0.99 = 21 12. 48.4 = 51

Multiplication and Division of Decimals 1 01
Calculate, giving your answers correct to 1 decimal place:
13. 32.9^8 17; 124-17 21; 213-22

14. 402^7
1®; 16.2-14 22; 8.4-13
15. 15.3 H-d

2®; 45-21 26-15
16. 9.76-11 20. 15.1-16 24; 519-19
Find, giving your answers correct to 3 decimal places:
25. 0.023-4 0.45- 12 0.2584-16
26. 0.123-7 30. 0.012-13 34. 0.321-17
27. 1.25-3 31; 0.654-23 1.26-32
28. 0.23-11 32. 0.98-32 36. 0.88-24
CHANGING FRACTIONS TO DECIMALS
EXERCISE 6h
Give ^ as a decimal.
0.16
4
— = 4-25 = 0.16 25 ) 4.00
25 25
(This is an exact answer.) 1 50
Give y as a decimal correct to 3 decimal places.
4
- = 4-7 = 0.5714 . . . 7 ) 4.0000
7
0.5714. . .
= 0.571 (correct to 3 decimal places)
(This is an approximate answer.)
Give the following fractions as exact decimals:
5 3 3 3 9
1. — 2. —
1 4. 5.
8 40 -
16 5 75
7 1 11 13 3
6. — 7. 8. 9; 10.
50 16 Y ^0
1 02 ST(P) Mathematics lA
Give the following fractions as decimals correct to 3 decimal places:
3 1 9 8 1
11. 13. 15. 17; —
11: -
7 6 IT 7 3
4 2 6 1 4
12. 14. 16. li: 20;
9 3 7 9 IT
3 6 3 4 3
21. 23. 25; 27. 29; —
14 13 19 15 22
4 4 3 7 4
22. 24. 26. 28. 30.
17 21 17 18 33
DIVISION BY DECIMALS
0.012^0.06 can be written as We know how to divide by a

whole number so we need to find an equivalent fraction with
denominator 6 instead of 0.06. Now 0.06x 100 = 6. Therefore we
multiply the numerator and denominator by 100.
0.012 0.012x100
0.06 “ 0.06 X 100
_ 1.2
“ I”
= 0.2
To divide by a decimal, the denominator must be made into a whole

number but the numerator need not be. We can write, for short,
0.0112 1.2 .. . , . . ,
0.012^-0.06 =-j— = -— (keeping the points in line)
0.06i 6
the dotted line indicating where we want the point to be so as to
make the denominator a whole number.
EXERCISE 6i Find the exact answers to the following questions:
0.024 0.6
0.0|24 0.24
0.024^0.6 6 ) 0.24
0.6l 6 0.04
0.04
64-0.08
64.00
64-0.08 = - f=:
6400 1 8 ) 6400
0.08 1 8
800
= 800
1. 0.04-0.2 5; 90-0.02 9; 3.6-0.06
2. 0.0006-0.03
i- 0.48-0.04 12: 3-0.6
3. 4-0.5 7. 0.032-0.2 IL 6.5-0.5
4. 0.8-0.04 i- 3.6-0.6 11: 8.4-0.07
13. 72-0.09 17; 0.9-0.009 IL 0.000 068 4-0.04
14. 1.08-0.003 H; 0.92-0.4 22; 20.8-0.0004
15. 0.0012-0.1 19; 16.8-0.8 23; 0.0012-0.3
16. 0.009-0.9 20; 0.001 32-0.11 24; 4.8-0.08
0.256- 1.6
0.2156 2.56 0.16

0.256-h 1.6 =
1.6! “ 16 16) 2.56
16
0.16
96
96
25. 1.76-2.2 29; 34.3-1.4 33; 9.8-1.4
26. 144-0.16 10.24-3.2 34. 0.168-0.14
27. 0.496-1.6 31; 0.0204-0.017 35; 1.35-0.15
28. 0.0288-0.18 32; 102.5-2.5 0.192-2.4
Find the value of 16.9 — 0.3 giving your answer correct to

1 decimal place.
16.9| 169 3 ) 169.00

16.9-0.3 =
0.3 l~ 56.333 . . .
= 56.313 .
1
= 56.3 (correct to 1 decimal place)
1 04 ST(P) Mathematics 1A
Calculate, giving your answers correct to 2 decimal places;
1. 3.8-0.6
£■ 1.25-0.03
2. 0.59-0.07 7. 0.0024-0.09
3. 15-0.9 0.65-0.7
4. 5.633-0.2 9. 0.0072-0.007
5. 0.796- 1.1 1£. 5-7
Calculate, giving your answers correct to the number of decimal

places indicated in the brackets:
11. 0.123-6 (2) ll- 0.23-0.007 (1)
12. 2.3-t-0.8 (1) 12; 16.2-0.8 (1)
13. 90-11 (1) 1®; 0.21-6.5 (3)
14. 0.0078-0.09 (3) 19; 85-0.3 (3)
15. 12-9 (4) 20. 1.37-0.8 (1)
21. 56.9-1.6 26; 0.045-0.012

(nearest whole number) (nearest whole number)
22. 0.89-0.23 (1) 12.3-17 (2)
23. 0.75-4.5 (3) 28; 0.0054-1.3 (4)
24. 0.023-0.021 (1) M; 0.012-0.021 (2)
25. 3.2-1.4 (1) 30; 0.52-0.21 (1)
EXERCISE 6k Calculate, giving your answers exactly:
1. 0.48x0.3 3. 2.56x0.02 5. 3.6 X 0.8
2. 0.48-0.3 4. 2.56-0.02 6. 9.6 X 0.6
7. 0.0042 X 0.03 9. 16.8x0.4 11. 20.4x0.6
8. 0.0042-0.03 10. 1.68-0.4 12. 5.04-0.06

0.12x3
0.006
0.12x3 0.36
12x3 = 36
0.006 “ 0.006
_ 360
= 60
Find the value of:
0.2 X 0.6 3.2 2.5 X 0.7

13; 11; 11;
0.4 4x0.2 3.5x4
1.2x0.04 3 5.6 X 0.8

l±- 17; 11;
0.3 0.6 x 0.5 6.4
4.8 X 0.2 4.4 X 0.3 0.9x4

1®; 0.6 X 0.4 11; 11 IL 0.5 X 0.6
RELATIVE SIZES
To compare the sizes of numbers they need to be in the same form,

either as fractions with the same denominators, or as decimals.
EXERCISE 61
Express 0.82, f, tt as decimals where necessary and write
them in order of size with the smallest first.
1=0.8
^ = 0.8181... 11 ) 9.000
11
0.8181...
4 9
In order of size: -, —, 0.82
Express the following sets of numbers as decimals or as fractions and

write them in order of size with the smallest first;
8 7 3 5 6
5.
1- ^ , 0.2
9’ 8 7’ IT’ 13
2 4 3 17
2. 10. 0.7,1
5’ 9 4’ 20
1 4
3. , 0.35 11. 0.3,
2’ 9 8’ 25 12
3 3 4
8. 12. -, 0.45, —
T’ IT 5’ 7’ 2’ 19
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 6m 1. Multiply 0.68 by

a) 10 b) 1000.
2. Express j as a decimal.
3. Give the following numbers correct to 2 decimal places:

a) 3.126 b) 0.075 c) 2.999
4. Add 3.86, 14.2 and 2.078.
5. Multiply 3.2 by 1.4.
6. Divide 8.2 by 5.
8. Which is larger, 6.6 or 6f? Why?
EXERCISE 6n 1. Express 0.06 as a fraction in its lowest terms.
2. Divide 6.24 by
a) 100 b) 12.
3. Add 3.2 and 0.9 and subtract the result from 5.8.
4. The perimeter of an equilateral triangle (a triangle with three

equal sides) is 19.2 cm. Eind the length of one side.
5. Divide 0.0432 by 0.9.
6. Express ^ as a decimal.
7. Find the cost of 24 articles at £2.32 each.

MuhipHcation and Division of Decimals 1 07
8. Give 7.7815 correct to

a) nearest whole number b) 1 decimal place
c) 3 decimal places.
EXERCISE 6p^ ^1. Give 5 as a recurring decimal.
2. Divide a) 6.4 b) 0.064 by 100.
3^ Multiply 14.8 by 1.1.
4. Express 0.62 as a fraction in its lowest terms.
5. Add 6.7, 0.67, 0.067 and 0.0067 together.
6. Divide 16.4 by 8.
7. Which is bigger, 0.7 or
8; How many pieces of ribbon of length 0.3 m can be cut from a

piece 7.5 m long?
EXERCISE 6q 1. Express ^ as a decimal.
2. Find 6.43 -t- 0.7 correct to 3 decimal places.
3. Find 0.06 x 0.06.
4. Express 0.0095 as a fraction in its lowest terms.
5. Find 13.8 + 2.43-1.6.
6. Find the cost of 3.5 m of ribbon at 17 p a metre.
0.6 X 0.3
7. Find
0.09
8. Write 0.6 in another way as a decimal. Why is it not easy to find

~ 0.7-0.6 !
METRIC UNITS
Whenever we want to measure a length, or weigh an object, we find

the length or weight in standard units. We might for instance give the
length of a line in millimetres or the weight of a bag of apples in
pounds. The millimetre belongs to a set of units called the metric
system. The pound is one of the imperial units.
UNITS OF LENGTH
The basic unit of length is the metre (m). To get an idea of how long
a metre is, remember that a standard bed is about 2 m long. However,
a metre is not a useful unit for measuring either very large things or
very small things so we need larger units and smaller units.
We get the larger unit by multiplying the metre by 1000. We get

smaller units by dividing the metre into 100 parts or 1000 parts.
1000 metres is called 1 kilometre (km)
(It takes about 15 minutes to walk a distance of 1 km.)
of a metre is called 1 centimetre (cm)
of a metre is called 1 millimetre (mm)
(You can see centimetres and millimetres on your ruler.)
EXERCISE 7a 1. Which metric unit would you use to measure

a) the length of your classroom
b) the length of your pencil
c) the length of a soccer pitch
d) the distance from Manchester to London
e) the length of a page in this book
f) the thickness of your exercise book?
2. Use your ruler to draw a line of length

a) 10 cm e) 20 mm i) 25 mm
b) 3 cm f) 4 cm j) 16 mm
c) 15 cm g) 15 mm k) 5 cm
d) 50 mm h) 12 cm l) 75 mm
108
Metric Units 109
3. Estimate the length, in centimetres, of the following lines:

a) -
b) -
c) -
d) -
e) -
Now use your ruler to measure each line.
4. Estimate the length, in millimetres, of the following lines:

a) - c) — e) -
b) - d) -
Now use your ruler to measure each line.
5. Use a straight edge (not a ruler with a scale) to draw a line that
is approximately
a) 10 cm long b) 5 cm long c) 15 cm long d) 20 mm long
Now measure eaeh line to see how good your approximation

was.
6. Estimate the width of your classroom in metres.
7. Estimate the length of your classroom in metres.
8. Measure the length and width of your exereise book in centi¬

metres. Draw a rough sketch of your book with the measure¬
ments on it. Find the perimeter (the distance all round) of your
book.
9. Eaeh side of a square is 10 cm long. Draw a rough sketch of the

square with the measurements on it. Caleulate the perimeter of
the square.
10. A sheet is 200 cm wide and 250 cm long. What is the perimeter
of the sheet?
CHANGING FROM LARGE UNITS TO SMALLER UNITS

The metric units of length are the kilometre, the metre, the centimetre
and the millimetre where
1 km = 1000m 1 m = lOOem
Im = 1000mm 1 em = 10mm
EXERCISE 7b Express the given quantity in terms of the unit in brackets:
3 km (m)
3 km = 3 X 1000 m
= 3000 m
3.5 m (cm)
3.5 m = 3.5 X 100cm
= 350cm
1. 2m (cm) 12 km (m) 9; 3m (mm)
2. 5 km (m)
1- 15 cm (mm) 2 km (mm)
3. 3 cm (mm) 7. 6m (mm)
11: 5m (cm)
4. 4m (cm)
i- 1 km (cm) IL 7m (mm)
13. 1.5 m (cm) 17; 1.9m (mm) 21; 3.8 cm (mm)
14. 2.3 cm (mm)

ll- 3.5 km (m) 22; 9.2 m (mm)
15. 4.6 km (m) la. 2.7 m (cm) 23; 2.3 km (m)
16. 3.7 m (mm) 20. 1.9 km (cm) 24. 8.4 m (cm)
UNITS OF WEIGHT
The most familiar units used for weighing are the kilogram (kg) and
the gram (g).
Most groceries that are sold in tins or packets have weights given in
grams. For example the weight of the most common packet of butter
is 250 g. One eating apple weighs roughly lOOg, so the gram is a small
unit of weight. Kilograms are used to give the weights of sugar and
flour: the weight of the most common bag of sugar is 1 kg and the
most common bag of flour weighs 1.5 kg.
For weighing large loads (coal or steel for example) a larger unit of
weight is needed, and we use the tonne (t). For weighing very small
quantities (for example the weight of a particular drug in one pill) we
use the milligram (mg).
Metric Units 111
The relationships between these weights are
It = 1000 kg
1kg = lOOOg
1g = 1000 mg
EXERCISE 7c Express each quantity in terms of the unit given in brackets:
2t (g)
2t = 2 X 1000 kg
= 2000 kg
= 2000X1000g
= 2 000 000 g
1. 12t (kg) 1 kg (mg) 9. 4 kg (g)

2. 3 kg (g) 1- 13 kg (g) 10; 2 kg (mg)
3. 5g (mg) 7. 6g (mg) IL 3t (kg)
4. It (g) 8. 2t (g) li: 4g (mg)
13. 1.5 kg (g) 17. 5.2 kg (mg) 21; 7.3 g (mg)

14. 2.71 (kg) ll- 0.6 g (mg) 0.3 kg (mg)
15. 1.8g (mg) 1£. 11.3t (kg) 23; 0.51 (kg)
16. 0.71 (kg) 20; 2.5 kg (g) 24; 0.8 g (mg)
MIXED UNITS
When you use your ruler to measure a line, you will probably find
that the line is not an exact number of centimetres. For example the
width of this page is 16 cm and 4 mm. We can say that the width of
this page is 16 cm 4 mm or we could give the width in millimetres
alone.
Now 16cm = 16 X 10mm
= 160 mm
So 16 cm 4 mm = 164 mm
EXERCISE Id Express each quantity in terms of the units given in brackets:
4 kg 50 g (g)
4 kg = 4 X 1000 g
= 4000g
Therefore 4 kg 50 g = 4050 g.
1. 1 m 36 cm (cm) 1- 3 km 20 m (m)
2. 3 cm 5 mm (mm) 7. 5m 2cm (cm)
3. 1 km 50 m (m) 8. 5 km 500 m (m)
4. 4 cm 8 mm (mm) 9; 20 cm 2 mm (mm)
5. 2m 7cm (cm) 1£. 8 m 9 mm (mm)
11. 3 kg 500 g (g) 1£. 1 kg 20g (g)
12. 2 kg 8 g (g) 17. 1 g 250 mg (mg)
13. 5 g 500 mg (mg) 18; 3 kg 550 g (g)
14. 21 800 kg (kg) H- 2t 50kg (kg)
15. 3t 250 kg (kg) 20. 1 kg lOg (g)
CHANGING FROM SMALL UNITS TO BIGGER UNITS
EXERCISE 7e Express the first quantity in terms of the units given in brackets:
400 cm (m)
400 cm = 400 100 m
= 4m
580 g (kg)
580g = 580-h 1000 kg
= 0.58 kg
Metric Units 113
In questions 1 to 20, express the first quantity in terms of the units
given in brackets;
1. 300 mm (cm) 72 m (km)

2. 6000 m (km) 7. 12 cm (m)
3. 150 cm (m) 88 mm (cm)
4. 250 mm (cm) 9. 1250 mm (m)
5. 1600 m (km) m 2850 m (km)
11. 1500 kg (t) 16: 86 kg (t)

12. 3680 g (kg) 17; 560 g (kg)
13. 1500 mg (g) 1^ 28 mg (g)
14. 5020 g (kg) 19; 190 kg (t)
15. 3800 kg (t) 20. 86 g (kg)
In questions 21 to 40 express the given quantity in terms of the units

given in brackets:
5 m 36 cm (m)
36 cm = 36100 m
= 0.36 m
So 5 m 36 cm = 5.36m.
21. 3 m 45 cm (m) 26; 5m 3cm (m)

22. 8 cm 4 mm (cm) 27. 7 km 5 m (km)
23. 11 km 2 m (km) 28. 4 m 5 mm (m)
24. 2 km 42 m (km) 29. 1 km 10 cm (km)
25. 4 cm 4 mm (cm) 30; 8 cm 5 mm (km)
31. 5 kg 142 g (kg) 4 g 111 mg

36; (g)
32. 48 g 171 mg (g) 37. 11 56 kg (t)
33. 9 kg 8 g (kg) 38; 5g 3mg (g)
34. 9 g 88 mg (g) 39; 250 g 500 mg (kg)
35. 12kg 19g (kg) 40; 850 kg 550 g (t)
ADDING AND SUBTRACTING METRIC QUANTITIES
EXERCISE 7f Quantities must be expressed in the same units before they are added
or subtracted.
Find 1 kg+158g in a) grams b) kilograms.
a) 1 kg = lOOOg
1 kg+158g = 1158g
(.'. means “therefore” or “it follows that”)
b) 158g =158H-1000kg
= 0.158 kg
.'. 1 kg+158g = 1.158 kg
Find the sum of 5 m, 4 cm and 97 mm in

a) metres b) centimetres.
a) 4cm = 4-^ 100m = 0.04m
97 mm = 97-h 1000 m = 0.097 m
.'. 5m + 4cm + 97mm = (5 + 0.04 + 0.097)m
= 5.137m
b) 5m = 5 X 100 cm = 500cm
97 mm = 97^ 10 cm = 9.7 cm
.'. 5m + 4cm + 97mm = (500 + 4 + 9.7)cm
= 513.7cm
Find, giving your answer in metres:
1. 5 m + 86cm £. 51 m + 3 km
2. 92cm+ 115 mm 36 cm + 87 mm + 520 cm
3. 3 km+ 136cm 120mm + 53cm + 4m
Find giving your answer in millimetres;
7. 36 cm+ 80 mm 10; 2 m + 45 cm + 6 mm
8. 5 cm + 5 mm IT. 3cm + 5m + 2.9cm
9. 1 m + 82cm 12. 34 cm + 18 mm + 1 m
Metric Units 115
Find, giving your answer in grams:
13. 3kg + 250g 1 kg + 0.8 kg+750g

11;
14. 5kg+ 115g 17. 116g + 0.93kg + 680 mg
15. 5.8 kg + 9.3 kg 248 g + 0.06 kg + 730 mg
11;
Find, expressing your answer in kilograms:

19. 2t + 580kg 22; 1.6t + 3.9kg + 2500g
20. 1.8t + 562 kg 23. 1.03t + 9.6kg + 0.05t
21. 390g+1.83kg 24. 5.4t + 272 kg + 0.3t
Find, expressing your answer in the units given in brackets:
25. 8 m —52 cm (cm) 20 g-150 mg (mg)

26. 52 mm+ 87 cm (m) 36 kg-580 g (g)
IL
27. 1.3kg-150g (g) 32; 1.51 —590 kg (kg)
28. 1.3 m —564 mm (cm) 3.9 m+ 582 mm (cm)
29. 2.051 +592 kg (kg) 0.3 m —29.5 cm (mm)
M;
wiwikaBB ■ V ^ iwi
MULTIPLYING
■ bI■
METRIC w Iv ■ ■ w
UNITS
EXERCISE 7g Calculate, expressing your answer in the units given in brackets:
3 X 2g 741 mg (g)
2g 741 mg = 2.741 g 2741

X 3
.'. 3 X 2g 741 mg = 3 X 2.741 g
8223
= 8.223 g
1; 4 X 3 kg 385 g (g) 2 X 5 cm 3 mm (cm)

2. 9 X 5 m 88 mm (mm) 7. 6 X 2g 561 mg (mg)
h 3 X 4kg 521 g (kg) 8. 8x3 km 56 m (km)

4. 5 X 2 m 51 cm (m) 9; 3 X 7t 590kg (t)
5; 10 X 31 200 kg (t) 11; 7x2 km 320 m (m)
PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 7h
Find, in kilograms, the total weight of a bag of flour
weighing 1.5 kg, a jar of jam weighing 450 g and a packet
of rice weighing 500 g.
The jar of jam weighs 450 g = 450 h- 1000 kg
= 0.45 kg
The packet of rice weighs 500 g = 500-h 1000 kg

= 0.5 kg
The total weight = (1.5 + 0.45 + 0.5) kg

= 2.45 kg
1. Find the sum, in metres, of 5 m, 52 cm, 420 cm.
2. Find the sum, in grams, of 1 kg, 260 g, 580 g.
3. Subtract 52 kg from 0.81, giving your answer in kilograms.
4. Find the difference, in grams, between 5 g and 890 mg.
5. Find the total length, in millimetres, of a piece of wood 82 cm

long and another piece of wood 260 mm long.
6. Find the total weight, in kilograms, of 500 g of butter, 2 kg of

potatoes, 1.5 kg of flour.
7. One tin of baked beans weighs 220 g. What is the weight, in

“ kilograms, of ten of these tins?
8. One fence post is 150 cm long. What length of wood, in metres,

is needed to make ten such fence posts?
9. Find the perimeter of a square if each side is of length 8.3 cm.

Give your answer in centimetres.
10. A wooden vegetable crate and its contents weigh 6.5 kg. If the
crate weighs 1.2 kg what is the weight of its contents?
MONEY UNITS
Many countries use units of money that are divided into hundredths.
For example
UK 1 pound (£) = 100 pence (p)
USA 1 dollar ($) = 100 cents (c)
France 1 franc = 100 centimes
Germany 1 mark = 100 pfennigs
Metric Units 117
EXERCISE 7i Express each quantity in terms of the units given in brackets:
1. 7 dollars (cents)
2. £6 (pence)
3. 8 marks (pfennigs)
4. 13 francs (centimes)
5. 7 francs 35 centimes (centimes)
43 dollars 81 cents (cents)

7. 11 marks 3 pfennigs (pfennigs)
i- £6 15 p (pence)
9; £2 10 p (pence)
10; £5 4p (pence)
420 p (£)
420 p = £4.20
(Note that we always give pounds to 2 decimal places so
we write £4.20 rather than £4.2. Other currencies are
written in the same way.)
11. 126p (£)
12. 350 cents (dollars)

13. 190p (£)
14. 350 pfennigs (marks)
15. 43 dollars 7 cents (dollars)
1^ 228 p (£)
17. 3 marks 47 pfennigs (marks)

18. 580 p (£)
19. 11 francs 9 centimes (francs)

20. £6 8 p (£)
^ One tin of baked beans costs 32 p. Find the cost, in pounds, of

ten of these tins.
2^ Find the total cost, in dollars, of a book costing $4, a pencil

costing 30 cents and a magazine costing 75 cents.
23. Find the cost, in pounds, of 20 litres of petrol at 48 p a litre.
24. One can of cola costs 50 pfennigs. Find the cost, in marks, of
twelve such cans.
25. Find the cost of six stamps at 22 p each and five stamps at 17p
each. If you paid for these stamps with a £5 note, how much
change would you get?
MIXED PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 7j
A girl takes to school a bag with books in it, a shoe bag
and a clarinet. The bag and its contents weigh 2.5 kg, the
shoe bag weighs 900 g and the clarinet weighs 1 kg 900 g.
What is the total weight, in kg, that the girl carries?
2.5 kg
900 g = 0.9 kg
1 kg 900 g = 1.9 kg
Total weight = 5.3 kg
1. A rectangular sheet of paper measures 32 cm by 17 cm. What is

its perimeter
a) in centimetres b) in millimetres?
2. A girl travels to school by walking 450 m to the bus stop and

“ then travelling 1 km 650 m by bus. The distance she walks after
getting off the bus is 130 m. What distance is her total journey
in kilometres?
3. A man takes three parcels to the Post Office and has them
weighed. One parcel weighs 4 kg 37 g, the weight of the second is
3 kg 982 g and the third one weighs 1kg 173g. What is their
total weight in kilograms?
4. A rectangular field is 947 m long and 581m wide. What is the

~ perimeter of the field? How many metres of fencing would be
needed to go round the field leaving space for two gates each
3 m wide?
5. Wood is sometimes sold by the ‘metric foot’. A metric foot is

” 30 cm. A man buys a length of wood which is 12 metric feet
long. How long is the piece of wood in metres?
Metric Units 119
^ A freight train has five trucks. Two of them are carrying
151 880 kg each. Another has a load of 14t 700 kg and the last
two are each loaded with 241 600 kg. What is the total weight,
m tonnes, of the contents of the five trucks? If the weight of
each truck is 51 260 kg, what is the combined weight of the
trucks and their contents?
A boy delivers newspapers by bicycle. The weight of the bicycle

is 15.8 kg and the boy weighs 51.3 kg. At the beginning of the
round the newspapers weigh 9.8 kg. What is the total weight of
the boy and his bicycle loaded with newspapers? What is the
weight when he has delivered half the newspapers?
8. Newtown is 5.62 km from Old Town and Old Town is 3.87 km

from Castletown. If a car goes from Newtown to Old Town,
then to Castletown and finally back to Old Town, how many
metres has it travelled? At the beginning of its journey the car
had enough petrol to go 27 km. At the end of its journey how
much further could it go before running out of petrol?
^ In France three letters are posted to various foreign countries.

The stamps cost 1 franc 50 centimes, 2 francs 80 centimes and
1 franc 90 centimes. What is the total cost of the stamps? How
much change would be given if the stamps were bought with a
10 franc piece
a) in francs b) in centimes?
^ A man takes a parcel to the Post Office. It weighs 3 kg 750 g.

The cost of postage is 45 p per 250 g. How much does the parcel
cost to post?
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 7k Express the given quantity in terms of the units given in brackets:
1. 4 km (m) 4. 250 g (kg) 7. 1 m 50 cm (m)
2. 30g (kg) 5. 0.03 km (cm) 8. 2.8 cm (mm)
3. 3.5m (cm) 6. 1250m (km) 9. 65 g (kg)
10. A tin of meat weighs 429 g. What is the weight, in kilograms, of

ten such tins?
EXERCISE 71 Express the given quantity in terms of the units in brackets:
1. 236 cm (m) 5. 4 km 250 m (km)
2. 0.02 m (mm) 6. 3.6t (kg)
3. 5 kg (g) 7. 2 kg 350 g (kg)
4. 500 mg (g) 8. 2g (mg)
9. Each side of a square is 65 cm long. What is the perimeter of the

square, in metres?
EXERCISE 7m Express the given quantity in terms of the units in brackets:
1. 5.781 (kg) 5. 1 1 560 kg (t)

2. £3 54 p (P) 6. 780 centimes (francs)
3. 350 kg (t) 7. 0.36g (mg)
4. 0.155 mm (cm) 8. 2 km 50 m (km)
9. A bus weighs 51 430 kg and carries 44 passengers each of whom

is assumed to weigh 72 kg. Find the weight, in tonnes, of the bus
and passengers when it is fully loaded.
EXERCISE 7n Express the given quantity in terms of the units in brackets:
1. 4 cm 2 mm (cm) 5. 36 mm (cm)
2. 350g (kg) 6. 0.47 m (mm)
3. £1 52p (£) 7. 36 cm (m)
4. 283 m (km) 8. 1356 mg (g)
9. A bag containing 2 p coins weighs 2.492 kg. If the weight of one

coin is 7.12g find the value in pounds of the coins in the bag.
IMPERIAL UNITS
UNITS OF LENGTH
Some imperial units are still used. For instance distances on road
signs are still given in miles. One mile is roughly equivalent to Ijkm.
A better approximation is
5 miles is about 8 kilometres
Yards, feet and inches are other imperial units of length that are still
used. In this system units are not always divided into ten parts to give
smaller units so we have to learn “tables”.
12 inches (in) = 1 foot (ft)
3 feet = 1 yard (yd)
1760 yards = 1 mile
EXERCISE 8a Express the given quantity in the units in brackets:
2 ft 5 in (in)
2 ft = 2 X 12 in
= 24in
.'. 2ft Sin = 24 + 5in
= 29in
1. 5 ft 8 in (in) 6. 2 miles 800 yd (yd)

2. 4 yd 2 ft (ft) 7. 5 yd 2 ft (ft)
3. 1 mile 49 yd (yd) 8. 10 ft 3 in (in)
4. 2ft 11 in (in) 9. 9 yd 1 ft (ft)
5. 8 ft 4 in (in) 10. 9 ft 10 in (in)
52 in (ft and in)
52 in = 52h- 12 ft 4 r4
121^
= 4 ft 4 in
121
11. 36 in (ft) 16. 2000 yd (miles and yd)
12. 29 in (ft and in) 17. 75 in (ft and in)
13. 86 in (ft and in) 18. 100 ft (yd and ft)
14. 9 ft (yd) 19. 120 in (ft and in)
15. 13 ft (yd and ft) 20. 30 000 yd (miles and yd)
UNITS OF WEIGHT
The imperial units of weight that are still used are pounds and
ounces. Other units of weight that you may still see are hundred¬
weights and tons (not to be confused with tonnes).
16 ounces (oz) = 1 pound (lb)
112 pounds = 1 hundredweight (cwt)
20 hundredweight = 1 ton
EXERCISE 8b Express the given quantity in terms of the units given in brackets:
1. 2 lb 6 oz (oz) 6. 24 oz (lb and oz)
4. 3 tons 4 cwt (cwt) 9. 30 cwt (tons and cwt)
5. 1 cwt 50 lb (lb) 10. 120 lb (cwt and lb)
ROUGH EQUIVALENCE BETWEEN METRIC AND IMPERIAL UNITS
If you shop in a supermarket you will find that nearly all prepacked
goods (tinned foods, sugar, biscuits, etc.) are sold in grams or
kilograms and nearly all fresh produce (meat, cheese, fruit, etc.) is
sold in pounds and ounces. It is often useful to be able to convert,
roughly, pounds into kilograms or grams into pounds. For a rough
conversion it is good enough to say that
1 kg is about 2 lb
although one kilogram is slightly more than two pounds.
One metre is slightly longer than one yard but for a rough conversion
it is good enough to say that
1 m is about 1 yd
Imperial Units 123
Remember that the symbol « means “is approximately equal to” so
1 kg ^ 2 lb
1 m « 1 yd or 3 ft
EXERCISE 8c In questions 1 to 10, write the first unit roughly in terms of the unit
in brackets:
5 kg (lb)
5 kg » 5 X 21b
5 kg % 101b
10 ft (m)
10ft 10-3m
10ft % 3.3m (to 1 d.p.)
1. 3 kg (lb) 6. 5m (ft)
2. 2m (ft) 7. 3.5 kg (lb)
3. 41b (kg) 8. 8 ft (m)
4. 9 ft (m) 9. 250 g (oz)
5. 1.5 kg (lb) 10. 500 g (lb)
In questions 11 to 16 use the approximation 5 miles « 8 km to

convert the given number of miles into an approximate number of
kilometres:
11. lOmiles 13. 15 miles 15. 75 miles
12. 20 miles 14. 100 miles 16. 40 miles
17. I buy a 51b bag of potatoes and two 1.5 kg bags of flour. What
weight, roughly, in pounds do I have to carry?
18. A window is 6 ft high. Roughly, what is its height in metres?
19. I have a picture which measures 2 ft by 1 ft. Wood for framing it

is sold by the metre. Roughly, what length of framing, in
metres, should I buy?
20. In the supermarket I buy a 4 kg packet of sugar and a 51b bag

of potatoes. Which is heavier?
21. In one catalogue a table cloth is described as measuring 4 ft by

8 ft. In another catalogue a different table cloth is described as
measuring 1 m by 2 m. Which one is bigger?
22. The distance between London and Dover is about 70 miles. The
distance between Calais and Paris is about 270 kilometres.
Which is the greater distance?
23. A recipe requires 250 grams of flour. Roughly, how many ounces
is this?
Converting from inches to centimetres and from centimetres to inches

is often useful. For most purposes it is good enough to say that
1 inch « 2jcm.
24. An instruction in an old knitting pattern says knit 6 inches.

Mary has a tape measure marked only in centimetres. How
many centimetres should she knit?
25. The instructions for repotting a plant say that it should go into
a 10 cm pot. The flower pots that Tom has in his shed are
marked 3 in, 4 in and 5 in. Which one should he use?
26. Peter Stuart wishes to extend his central heating which was
installed several years ago in 1 in and jin diameter copper
tubing. The only new piping he can buy has diameters of
10 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm or 25 mm. Use the approximation
lin« 2.5 cm to determine which piping he should buy that
would be nearest to
a) the 1 in pipes b) the j in pipes.
27. A carpenter wishes to replace a 6 in floorboard. The only sizes

available are metric and have widths of 12 cm, 15 cm, 18 cm and
20cm. Use the approximation 1 in ^ 2.5cm to determine which
one he should buy.
28. A shop sells material at £10.50 per metre while the same
material is sold in the local market at £9 per yard. Using
4 in % 10 cm find which is cheaper.
INTRODUCING GEOMETRY
FRACTIONS OF A REVOLUTION
When the seconds hand of a clock starts at

12 and moves round until it stops at 12
again it has gone through one complete
turn.
One complete turn is called a revolution.
When the seconds hand starts at 12

and stops at 3 it has turned through
^ of a revolution.
EXERCISE 9a What fraction of a revolution does the seconds hand of a clock turn
through when:
it starts at 4 and stops at 8
5 of a revolution
1. it starts at 12 and stops at 9
125
15. it starts at 9 and stops at 5?
Where does the seconds hand stop if:
it starts at 12 and turns through ^ of a

revolution.
It stops at 3.
16. it starts at 12 and turns through j a turn
17. it starts at 12 and turns through f of a turn
18. it starts at 6 and turns through ^ of a turn
19. it starts at 9 and turns through j a turn
20. it starts at 6 and turns through a complete turn
21. it starts at 9 and turns through J of a turn
22. it starts at 12 and turns through j of a turn

Introducing Geometry 127
23. it starts at 12 and turns through f of a turn
24. it starts at 9 and turns through a complete turn
25. it starts at 6 and turns through j a turn?
BEARINGS
The four main compass directions are north, south, east and west.
If you stand facing north and turn clockwise through j a revolution

you are then facing south.
EXERCISE 9b 1. If you stand facing west and turn anticlockwise through | of a

revolution, in which direction are you facing?
2. If you stand facing south and turn clockwise through j of a

revolution, in which direction are you facing?
3. If you stand facing north and turn, in either direction, through a

complete revolution, in which direction are you facing?
4. If you stand facing west and turn through j a revolution, in

which direction are you facing? Does it matter if you turn
clockwise or anticlockwise?
5. If you stand facing south and turn through Ij revolutions, in

which direction are you facing?
6. If you stand facing west and turn clockwise to face south what
part of a revolution have you turned through?
7. If you stand facing north and turn clockwise to face west how
much of a revolution have you turned through?
8. If you stand facing east and turn to face west what part of a
revolution have you turned through?
ANGLES
When the hand of a clock moves from one position to another it has
turned through an angle.
RIGHT ANGLES
A quarter of a revolution is called a right angle.
Half a revolution is two right angles.
EXERCISE 9c How many right angles does the seconds hand of a clock turn
through when:
it starts at 3 and stops at 12.
It turns through three right angles
8. it starts at 7 and stops at 7?

Introducing Geometry 1 29
How many right angles do you turn through if you:
9. face north and turn clockwise to face south
10. face west and turn clockwise to face north
11. face south and turn clockwise to face west
12. face north and turn anticlockwise to face east
13. face north and turn to face north again?
ACUTE, OBTUSE AND REFLEX ANGLES
Any angle that is smaller than a right

angle is called an acute angle.
Any angle that is greater than one

right angle and less than two right
angles is called an obtuse angle.
Any angle that is greater than two

right angles is called a reflex angle.
EXERCISE 9d What type of angle is each of the following?

DEGREES
One complete revolution is divided into 360 parts. Each part is called
a degree. 360 degrees is written 360 .
360 seems a strange number of parts to have in a revolution but it is

a good number because so many whole numbers divide into it exactly.
This means that there are many fractions of a revolution that can be
expressed as an exact number of degrees.
EXERCISE 9e 1. How many degrees are there in half a revolution?
2. How many degrees are there in one right angle?
3. How many degrees are there in three right angles?
How many degrees has the seconds hand of a clock turned

through when it moves from 6 to 9?
It has turned through 90°.

How many degrees has the seconds hand of a clock turned through
when it moves from:
4. 12 to 6 8. 9 to 6 11; 8 to 5
5. 3 to 6 9. 2 to 5 11; 4 to 10
6. 6 to 3 10. 7 to 11
If; 5 to 8
7. 9 to 3 11. 1 to 10 15. 6 to 12?
How many degrees has the seconds hand of a clock turned through
when it moves from:
6 to 8
Either f of 90° = 60°
or of 360° = 60°
16. 8 to 9
17. 10 to halfway between 11 and 12
18. 6 to 10
19. 1 to 3
20. 3 to halfway between 4 and 5
26. 3 to 10
27. 2 to 8
28. 10 to 8
29. 12 to 11
30. 9 to 2
USING A PROTRACTOR TO MEASURE ANGLES

It has a straight line at or near the straight edge. This line is called
the base line.
The centre of the base line is marked.
The protractor has two scales, an inside one and an outside one.
To measure the size of this angle, first

decide whether it is acute or obtuse.
This is an acute angle because it is less

than 90°.
Next place the protractor on the angle as shown.
One arm of the angle is on the

base line.
The vertex (point) of the angle is

at the centre of the base line.
Choose the scale that starts at 0° on the arm on the base line. Read
off the number where the other arm cuts this scale.
Check with your estimate to make sure that you have chosen the right
scale.
EXERCISE 9f Measure the following angles (if necessary, turn the page to a
convenient position):
1. 2.
33
reflex angle. Now find its size. Chai
ir and each check the other’s measui
MIXED QUESTIONS
EXERCISE 9g Use a clock diagram to draw the angle that the minute hand of a
clock turns through in the following times. In each question write
down the size of the angle in degrees;
1. 5 minutes 3. 15 minutes 5. 25 minutes
2. 10 minutes 4. 20 minutes 6. 30 minutes
The seconds hand of a clock starts at 12. Which number is it pointing

to when it has turned through an angle of:
7. 90° 11. 150° 15. 420° 19. 540°
8. 60° 12. 270° 16. 180° 20. 240°
9. 120° 13. 30° 17. 450° 21. 390°
10. 360° 14. 300° 18. 210° 22. 720°?
If you start by facing north and turn clockwise, draw a sketch to

show roughly the direction in which you are facing if you turn
through:
23.
o
O
45° 26. 29. 20° 32. 10°

o
O
24. 27. 30.

oo
O
o
200' 100° 33.

25. 120° 28. 300' 31. 270° 34. 250'
Estimate the size, in degrees, of each of the following angles:

44. \
Draw the following angles as well as you can by estimating, i.e.

without using a protractor. Use a clockface if it helps. Then measure
your angles with a protractor.
47. 45° 50. 30° 53. 150° 20° 59; 330'
48. 90° 51. 60° 54. 200° 5° 60; 95°
49. 120° 52. 10° 55. 290° 58. 170° 61. 250'
DRAWING ANGLES USING A PROTRACTOR
To draw an angle of 120° start by drawing

one arm and mark the vertex.
Place your protractor as shown in

the diagram. Make sure that the
vertex is at the centre of the base
line.
Choose the scale that starts at 0°

on your drawn line and mark the
paper next to the 120° mark on
the scale.
Remove the protractor and join

your mark to the vertex.
Now look at your angle: does it look

the right size?
EXERCISE 9h Use your protractor to draw the following angles accurately:
1. 25° 4. 160° 7. 110° 10; 125° 11; 105'
2. 37° 5. 83° 8. 49° n 175° Il¬ 136'
3. 55° 6. 15° 9. 65° 12. 72° ls. 85°
Change books with your neighbour and measure each other’s angles
as a check on accuracy.
EXERCISE 9i In questions 1 and 2 first measure the angle marked r. Then estimate
the size of the angle marked Check your estimate by measuring
angle
In each of the following questions, write down the size of the angle
marked /, without measuring it:
VERTICALLY OPPOSITE ANGLES
When two straight lines cross, four angles are formed.
The two angles that are opposite each other are called vertically
opposite angles. After working through the last exercise you should
now be convinced that
vertically opposite angles are equal
i.e. p = r and s = q.
ANGLES ON A STRAIGHT LINE
The seconds hand of a clock starts

at 9 and stops at 11 and then
starts again and finally stops at 3.
Altogether the seconds hand has

turned through half a revolution,
so p + q = 180°.
EXERCISE 9j 1. Draw a diagram showing the two angles that you turn through if
you start by facing north and then turn clockwise through 60°,
stop for a moment and then continue turning until you are facing
south. What is the sum of these two angles?
2. Draw a clock diagram to show the two angles turned through by

the seconds hand if it is started at 2, stopped at 6, started again
and finally stopped at 8. What is the sum of these two angles?
3. Draw an angle of 180°, without using your protractor.
SUPPLEMENTARY ANGLES
Angles on a straight line add up to 180°.
Two angles that add up to 180° are called supplementary angles.
EXERCISE 9k In questions 1 to 12 calculate the size of the angle marked with a

letter:
141
In questions 13 to 18 write down the pairs of angles that are

supplementary:
In questions 19 to 26 calculate the size of the angles marked with a

letter:
d and 70 are equal (they are vertically opposite)
d = 70“
e and 70“ add up 180“ (they are angles on a straight line)
e = 110“
/ and e are equal (they are vertically opposite)
/= 110“
EXERCISE 91 In questions 1 to 10 find the size of the angle marked with a letter
PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 9m 1. Find each of the equal angles marked
2. The angle marked / is twice the angle

marked g. Find angles / and g.
3. Find each of the equal angles marked d.
Each of the equal angles marked p is 25".

Find the reflex angle q.
Each of the equal angles marked d is 30°.

Angle d and angle e are supplementary.
Find angles e and /. (An angle marked
with a square is a right angle.)
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 9n
X What angle does the minute hand of a clock turn through when it
moves from 1 to 9?
z- Draw an angle of 50”.
3. Estimate the size of this angle;
Ji. Write down the size of the

angle marked p.
Write down the size of the

angle marked s.
Find each of the equal angles

marked e.
EXERCISE 9p What angle does the minute hand of a clock turn through when it
moves from 10 to 6?
X If you start facing north and turn clockwise through an angle of

270°, in which direction are you then facing?
Measure the angle marked q.
4^ Write down the sizes of the

angles marked / and g.
5. Write down the size of the

angle marked h.
JB'i Angles p and q are supplementary. Angle p is five times the size
of angle q. What is the size of angle q"!
SYMMETRY
LINE SYMMETRY
The four shapes above are symmetrical. If

they were folded along the broken line, one
half of the drawing would fit exactly over
the other half.
Fold a piece of paper in half and cut a

shape from the folded edge. When un¬
folded, the resulting shape is symmetrical.
The fold line is the axis of symmetry.
EXERCISE 10a Some of the shapes below have one axis of symmetry and some have
none. State which of the drawings 1 to 6 have an axis of symmetry.
148
Symmetry 149
Copy the following drawings on squared paper and complete them so

that the broken line is the axis of symmetry:
TWO AXES OF SYMMETRY
In these shapes there are two lines along which it is possible to fold
the paper so that one half fits exactly over the other half.
Fold a piece of paper twice, cut a

shape as shown and unfold it. The
resulting shape has two axes of
symmetry.
O'
EXERCISE 10b How many axes of symmetry are there in each of the following shapes?
Copy the following drawings on squared paper and complete them so

that the two broken lines are the two axes of symmetry.
Symmetry 151
EXERCISE 10c How many axes of symmetry are there for each of the following
shapes?
5. Fold a square piece of paper twice

then fold it a third time along the
broken line. Cut a shape, simple or
complicated, and unfold the paper.
How many axes of symmetry does it
have?
Copy the triangle on squared paper and

mark in the axis of symmetry.
A triangle with an axis of symmetry is

called an isosceles triangle.
Symmetry 153
Copy the quadrilateral on squared paper

and mark in the two axes of symmetry.
This quadrilateral (which has four equal

sides) is called a rhombus.
8. Trace the triangle. Draw in its axes of

symmetry. Measure its three sides.
This triangle is called an equilateral

triangle.
ROTATIONAL SYMMETRY (S-SYMMETRY)
These shapes have a different type of symmetry. They cannot be

folded in half but can be turned or rotated about a centre point
(marked with X) and still look the same.
EXERCISE lOd 1. Lay a piece of tracing paper over any one of the shapes above,
trace it and turn it about the cross until it fits over the shape
again.
Some shapes have both line symmetry and rotational symmetry;
8. Sketch the capital letters of the

alphabet. Mark any axes of symmetry
and the centre of rotation if it exists.
For instance, draw H.
9. Which of the shapes in Exercise 10c have rotational symmetry?
CONGRUENCE
The diagram at the top of page 155 was drawn on a computer.

Triangle A was drawn first. The other triangles were obtained by
copying A in various ways, including turning it over and round.
All the triangles are exactly the same shape and size. If they were cut
out, they would fit exactly over each other.
Symmetry 155
Any two figures that are exactly the same shape

and size are called congruent figures.
EXERCISE lOe In each of the following questions, state whether or not the two figures
are congruent. If you are not sure, trace one figure and see if the
tracing will fit over the other figure.
SECTIONS
Imagine cutting straight through the middle of a cube as shown in the

diagram.
The cut face, which is shaded, is called a section of the cube. In this
case the section is a square.
When we make a straight cut through a solid, we say that the solid is
cut by a plane, i.e. the section is flat.
EXERCISE lOf 1. A sphere of radius 2 cm is cut by a plane passing through the

centre. Draw the section.
2. A cylinder is cut by a plane as shown in the diagram. Draw the

section.
3. The cube is cut into two pieces by the plane through A, B, C

and D.
a) Sketch ABCD, marking in any lengths and angles that you

know. Is AB equal to AD?
b) What type of quadrilateral is ABCD?

Symmetry 157
4. Draw the shape of the section given by slicing down through the
middle of each of the following solids.
PLANES OF SYMMETRY
Imagine that a solid is cut into two pieces by a plane.
Now take one of the pieces and put the cut face against a mirror.
Does the piece, together with its reflection, look like the complete
solid?
If it does, as happens in this case, then the cut has been made in a
plane of symmetry.
Not all planes which cut a solid in half are planes of symmetry. The
cuboid below has not been cut in a plane of symmetry. If one half is
placed against a mirror we do not see a cuboid.
TRIANGLES AND ANGLES
CONSTRUCTIONS
When a new object, for example a new car, is designed there are
many jobs that have to be done before it can be made. One of these
jobs is to make accurate drawings of the parts. This is called technical
drawing.
To draw accurately you need
a sharp pencil
a ruler
a pair of compasses
a protractor
USING A PAIR OF COMPASSES
Using a pair of compasses is not easy: it needs practice. Draw several

circles. Make some of them small and some large. You should not be
able to see the place at which you start and finish.
Now try drawing the daisy pattern below.
Draw a circle of radius 5 cm. Keeping

the radius the same, put the point of the
compasses at A and draw an arc to meet
the circle in two places, one of which
is B. Move the point to B and repeat
Carry on moving the point of your
compasses round the circle until the
pattern is complete.
Repeat the daisy pattern but this time draw complete circles instead of
arcs.
There are some more patterns using compasses in Exercise Ilk on

page 177.
159
DRAWING STRAIGHT LINES OF A GIVEN LENGTH
To draw a straight line that is 5 cm long, start by using your ruler to

draw a line that is longer than 5 cm.
Then mark a point on this line near one end as shown. Label it A.
Next use your compasses to

measure 5 cm on your ruler.
Then put the point of the com¬

passes on the line at A and
\
draw an arc to cut the line as “"b"
shown.
The length of line between A and B should be 5 cm. Measure it with

your ruler.
EXERCISE 11a Draw, as accurately as you can, straight lines of the following lengths:
1. 6 cm 3. 12 cm 5. 8.5 cm 7. 4.5 cm
2. 2 cm 4. 9 cm 6. 3.5 cm 8. 6.8 crh
TRIANGLES
A triangle has three sides and three angles.
The corners of the triangle are called vertices. (One corner is called a
vertex.) So that we can refer to one particular side, or to one
particular angle, we label the vertices using capital letters. In the
diagram above we used the letters A, B and C so we can now talk
about “the triangle ABC” or “AABC”.
Triangles and Angles 161
The side between A and B is called “the side AB” or AB.

The side between A and C is called “the side AC” or AC.
The side between B and C is called “the side BC” or BC.
The angle at the corner A is called “angle A” or A for short.
EXERCISE 11b 1. Write down the name of the

side which is 4 cm long.
Write down the name of the

side which is 2 cm long.
2. Write down the name of

a) the side which is 2.5 cm long
b) the side which is 2 cm long
c) the angle which is 70°
In the following questions, draw a rough copy of the triangle and

mark the given measurements on your drawing:
c
Make a rough drawing of the following triangles. Label each one and
mark the measurements given:
7. AABC in which AB = 10 cm, BC = 8 cm and B = 60°.
8. APQR in which P = 90°, Q = 30° and PQ = 6cm.
9. ADEF in which DE = 8cm, D = 50° and DF = 6cm.
10. AXYZ in which XY = 10cm, X = 30° and Y = 80°.
ANGLES OF A TRIANGLE
Draw a large triangle of any shape. Use a straight edge to draw the
sides. Measure each angle in this triangle, turning your page to a
convenient position when necessary. Add up the sizes of the three
angles.
Draw another triangle of a different shape. Again measure each angle

and then add up their sizes.
Now try this: on a piece of paper draw a triangle of any shape and
cut it out. Next tear off each corner and place the three corners
together.
They should look like this:
The three angles of a triangle add up to 180'

PROBLEMS
Reminder: Vertically opposite angles are equal.

Angles on a straight line add up to 180°.
You will need these facts in the next exercise.
EXERCISE lid In each question make a rough copy of the diagram and mark the
sizes of the angles that you are asked to find:
CONSTRUCTING TRIANGLES GIVEN ONE SIDE AND TWO ANGLES
If we are given enough information about a triangle we can make an

accurate drawing of that triangle. The mathematical word for “make
an accurate drawing of” is “construct”.
For example: construct A ABC in which AB = 7 cm, X = 30° and

B = 40°.
First make a rough sketch of

AABC and put all the given
measurements in your sketch.
A 1
Next draw the line AB making
it 7 cm long. Label the ends. B
1
I
Then use your protractor to

make an angle of 30° at A.
Next make an angle of 40° at B.

If necessary extend the arms of
the angles until they cross; this
is the point C.
We can calculate C because A + B+C = 180° so C = 110'. Now as

a check we can measure C in our construction.
EXERCISE lie Construct the following triangles; calculate the third angle in each
triangle and then measure this angle to check the accuracy of your
construction.
1. AABC in which AB = 8cm, A = 50°, B = 20°
2. APQR in which QR = 5 cm, Q = 30°, R = 90

3. ADEF in which EF = 6cm, E = 50°, F = 60°
4. AXYZ in which YZ = 5.5cm, Y = 100°, Z = 40°
5. AUVW in which V = 35°, VW = 5.5cm, W = 75°
AFGH in which F = 55 , G = 70°, FG = 4.5 cm
7. AKLM in which KM = 10cm, K = 45°, M =45°
ABCD in which B = 100°, BC = 8.5cm, C = 45
9. AGHI in which GI = 7cm, G = 25°, t = 45"
10. AJKL in which J = 50°, JL = 6.5cm, L = 35°
CONSTRUCTING TRIANGLES GIVEN TWO SIDES AND THE ANGLE

BETWEEN THE TWO SIDES
To construct APQR in which PQ = 4.5 cm, PR = 5.5 cm and

P = 35°, first draw a rough sketch of APQR and put in all the
measurements that you are given.
Draw one of the sides whose

length you know; we will draw
PQ.
Now using your protractor

make an angle of 35° at P.
Make the arm of the angle quite
long.

measure the length of PR on
your ruler.
Then with the point of your

compasses at P, draw an arc to
cut the arm of the angle. This is
the point R.
Now join R and Q.

EXERCISE Ilf Construct each of the following triangles and measure the third side:
1. AABC in which AB = 5.5cm, BC = 6.5cm, B = 40"
2. APQR in which PQ = 6 cm, QR = 8 cm, Q = 35"
3. AXYZ in which XZ = 4.5cm, YZ = 6.5cm, Z = 70"
4. ADEF in which DE = 6 cm, E = 50°, EE = 11cm
5. AHJK in which HK = 4.2 cm, H = 45 , HJ = 5.3 cm
6. AABC in which AC = 6.3cm, C = 48", CB = 5.1cm
7. AXYZ in which Y = 65", XY = 3.8 cm, YZ = 4.2 cm
8. APQR in which R = 52", RQ = 5.8 cm, PR = 7 cm
9. ALMN in which N = 73", LN = 4.1cm, MN = 6.3 cm
10. AABC in which AC = 5.2 cm, BA = 7.3 cm, A = 56"
CONSTRUCTING TRIANGLES GIVEN THE LENGTHS OF THE THREE SIDES
To construct AXYZ in which XY = 5.5 cm, XZ = 3.5 cm,

YZ = 6.5 cm first draw a rough sketch of the triangle and put in all
the given measurements.
z
Next draw
draw XY.
Then with your compasses

measure the length of XZ from
your ruler. With the point of
your compasses at X draw a
wide arc.

measure the length of YZ from
your ruler. Then with your com¬
passes point at Y draw another
large arc to cut the first arc.
Where the two arcs cross is the
point Z. Join ZX and ZY.
EXERCISE 11 g Construct the following triangles:
1. AABC in which AB = 7 cm, BC = 8 cm, AC = 12 cm
2. APQR in which PQ = 4.5 cm, PR = 6 cm, QR = 8 cm
3. AXYZ in which XZ = 10.4cm, XY = 6 cm, YZ = 9.6 cm
4. ADEF in which DE = 8 cm, DF = 10cm, EF = 6 cm
5. AABC in which AB = 7.3 cm, BC = 6.1cm, AC = 4.7 cm
ADEF in which DE = 10.4cm, EF = 7.4 cm, DF = 8.2 cm
7. APQR in which PQ = 8.8 cm, QR = 6.6 cm, PR = 11cm
ALMN in which LN = 7 cm, NM = 5.3 cm, LM = 6.1cm
9. AXYZ in which XY = 12cm, YZ = 5cm, XZ = 13cm
10. AABC in which AB — 5.5 cm, BC = 6 cm, AC = 6.5 cm
EXERCISE 11 h Construct the following triangles. Remember to draw a rough diagram

of the triangle first and then decide which method you need to use;
1. AABC in which AB = 7cm, A = 30°, B = 50°
2. APQR in which PQ = 5 cm, QR = 4 cm, RP = 7 cm
3. ABCD in which B = 60”, BC = 5 cm, BD = 4cm
4. AWXY in which WX = 5 cm, XY = 6 cm, X = 90°
5. AKLM in which KL = 6.4 cm, LM = 8.2 cm, KM = 12.6 cm
AABC in which A = 45°, AC = 8 cm, C = 110°
ADEF in which E = 125 , DE = 4.5 cm, FE = 5.5 cm
8. APQR in which P = 72”, R = 53°, PR = 5.1 cm
9. AXYZ in which XY = 4 cm, YZ = 6 cm, XZ = 9 cm
10. ACDE in which CD = DE = 6 cm, D = 60°
11. Try to construct a triangle ABC in which A = 30°,

AB = 5 cm, BC = 3 cm.
12. Construct two triangles which fit the following measurements:

APQR in which P = 60°, PQ = 6 cm, QR = 5.5 cm.
13. Construct AABC in which A = 120”, AB = 4 cm,

BC = 6 cm. Can you construct more than one triangle that fits
these measurements?
QUADRILATERALS
A quadrilateral has four sides. These shapes are examples of

quadrilaterals;
The following diagrams are also quadrilaterals, but each one is a

“special” quadrilateral with its own name:
Square Rectangle Parallelogram Rhombus Trapezium
Draw yourself a large quadrilateral, but do not make it one of the

special cases. Measure each angle and then add up the sizes of the
four angles.
Do this again with another three quadrilaterals.
Now try this: on a piece of paper draw a quadrilateral. Tear off each
corner and place the vertices together. It should look like this:
The sum of the four angles of a quadrilateral is 360°.
This is true of any quadrilateral whatever its shape or size.

Make a rough copy of the following diagrams and mark on your

diagram the sizes of the required angles. You can also write in the
sizes of any other angles that you may need to find.
In questions 1 to 10 find the size of the angle marked d'.

11. Find each of the equal angles d.
12. Find each of the equal angles d.
13. Angle e is twice angle d. Find

angles d and e.
14. Find angles d and e.
15. Find each of the equal angles e.
16. Angles d and e are

supplementary. Find each of
the equal angles e.
SOME SPECIAL TRIANGLES: EQUILATERAL AND ISOSCELES
A triangle in which all three sides are the same length is called an
equilateral triangle.
B
Construct an equilateral triangle in which the sides are each of length

6 cm. Label the vertices A, B and C.
On a separate piece of paper construct a triangle of the same size and

cut it out. Label the angles A, B and C inside the triangle.
Place it on your first triangle. Now turn it round and it should still fit
exactly. What do you think this means about the three angles?
Measure each angle in the triangle.
In an equilateral triangle all three

sides are the same length and
each of the three angles is 60°.
A triangle in which two sides are equal is called an isosceles triangle.
On a piece of paper construct an isosceles triangle PQR in which

PQ = 8 cm, PR = 8 cm and P = 80°. Cut it out and fold the
triangle through P so that the corners at Q and R meet. You should
find that Q = R. (The fold line is a line of symmetry.)
I /4 ST(P) Mathematics 1A
In an isosceles triangle two sides

are equal and the two angles at
the base of the equal sides are
equal.
EXERCISE 11j In questions 1 to 10 make a rough sketch of the triangle and mark
angles that are equal:
75
EXERCISE 11k The patterns below are made using a pair of compasses. Try copying
them. Some instructions are given which should help.
Draw a straight line. Open your compasses to a radius of 3 cm

and draw a circle with its centre on the line. Move the point of
the compasses 3 cm along the line and draw another circle.
Repeat as often as you can.
2. Draw a square of side 4 cm. Open your compasses to a radius of

4 cm and with the point on one corner of the square draw an arc
across the square. Repeat on the other three corners.
Try the same pattern, but

leave out the sides of the
square; just mark the corners.
A block of four of these looks
good.
3. Draw a square of side 8 cm. Mark the midpoint of each side.

Open your compasses to a radius of 4 cm, and with the point on
the middle of one side of the square, draw an arc. Repeat at the
other three midpoints.
4. On a piece of paper construct an equilateral triangle of side 4 cm.
Construct an equilateral triangle, again of side 4 cm, on each of

the three sides of the first triangle.
Cut out the complete diagram. Fold the outer triangles up so that
the corners meet. Stick the edges together using the tabs. You
have made a tetrahedron. (These make good Christmas tree
decorations if made out of foil-covered paper.)
MIXED EXERCISES
4. Construct AABC in which AB = 6 cm, BC = 4 cm and

B = 40 . Measure AC.
5. Construct AABC in which A = 90°, AB = 6 cm, AC = 8 cm.

Measure BC.
EXERCISEHm I-. Find the size of the angles

marked p and q.
Find the size of the angles

z' marked x and y.
Be careful: this question needs some calculation before you can

construct AABC.
Construct the isosceles triangle ABC in which AB = BC = 6 cm

and one of the base angles is 70°.
EXERCISE 11n 1. All three sides of the large

triangle are equal. Find angles
r and s.
2. Find angles x, y and z.
3. Find angles / and g.
4. Construct an isosceles triangle in which the equal sides are of

length 5 cm and one of the base angles is 45°.
5. Construct a quadrilateral ABCD in which AB = 5cm, A = 70°,

“ AD = 3 cm, BC = 5 cm, DC = 5 cm. Measure all four angles
in the quadrilateral and find their sum.
FACTORS AND INDICES
FACTORS
The number 2 is a factor of 12, since 2 will divide exactly into 12.
The number 12 may be expressed as the product of two factors in

several different ways, namely:
1x12 2x6 or 3x4
EXERCISE 12a Express each of the following numbers as the product of two factors,
giving all possibilities:
1. 18 5. 30 9. 48 80 17.
11: 120
2. 20 6. 36 10. 60 14; 96
H 135
3. 24 7. 40 11. 64 100 144

11 11
4. 27 8. 45 12. 72 16. 108 20. 160
MULTIPLES
12 is a multiple of 2 since 12 contains the number 2 a whole number

of times.
EXERCISE 12b 1. Write down all the multiples of 3 between 20 and 40.
2. Write down all the multiples of 5 between 19 and 49.
PRIME NUMBERS
Some numbers can be expressed as the product of two factors in only

one way. For example, the only factors of 3 are 1 and 3 and the only
factors of 5 are 1 and 5. Any number bigger than 1 that is of this
type is called a prime number. Note that 1 is not a prime number.
EXERCISE 12c 1. Which of the following numbers are prime numbers?

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13
2. Write down all the prime numbers between 20 and 30.
181
3. Write down all the prime numbers between 30 and 50.
4. Which of the following numbers are prime numbers?
5, 10, 19, 29, 39, 49, 61
5. Which of the following numbers are prime numbers?

41, 57, 91, 101, 127
6. Are the following statements true or false?

a) All prime numbers are odd numbers.
b) All odd numbers are prime numbers.
c) All prime numbers between 10 and 100 are odd numbers.
d) The only even prime number is 2.
e) There are six prime numbers less than 10.
INDICES
The accepted shorthand way of writing 2x2x2x2 is 2'^. We read this as

“2 to the power of 4” or “2 to the fourth”. The 4 is called the index. Hence
16 = 2x2x2x2 = 2* and similarly 3^ = 3x3x3 = 27.
EXERCISE 12d Write the following products in index form:
1. 2x2x2 6. 3x3x3x3x3x3
2. 3 X 3 X 3 X 3 7. 13x 13x 13
3. 5 X 5 X 5 X 5 8. 19x 19
4. 7x7x7x7x7 9. 2x2x2x2x2x2x2
5. 2x2x2x2x2 10. 6 X 6 X 6 X 6
Find the value of:
3^
3^ = 3x3x3x3x3 = 243
11. 2" 13. 5" 15. 3" 17. 3^

12. 3^ 14. 2^ 16. 7^ 18. 2^
Express the following numbers in index form:
m 4 21^ 8 23. 49 25. 32
20. 9 22. 27 24. 25 26. 64

Factors and Indices 183
We can now write any number as the product of prime numbers in

index form. Consider the number 108;
108 =12x9
= 4x3x9
= 2x2x3x3x3
i.e. 108 = 2^x33
Therefore 108 expressed as the product of prime numbers or factors in

index form is 2^ x 3^. Similarly
441 =9x49
= 3x3x7x7
= 3^x7^
EXERCISE 12e Write the following products in index form:
2x2x3x3x3
2x2x3x3x3 = 2^ x3^
1. 2X2X7X7 6. 3x11x11x2x2
2. 3x3x3x5x5 7. 7x7x7x3x5x7x3
3. 5x5x5x13x13 8. 13x5x13x5x13
4. 2x3x3x5x2x5 9. 3x5x5x3x7x3x7
5. 2x2x3x2x3x5x5 10. 2x3x2x5x3x5
Find the value of:
2^x3^
2^ x3^ = 2x2x2x3x3 = 72
11. 2^x3^ 13. 2^x7 15. 2^ X 3^x5
12. 3^x5^ 14. 2^x3^ 16. 2x32x7
FINDING PRIME FACTORS
The following rules may help us to decide whether a given number

has certain prime numbers as factors:
A number is divisible
by 2 if the last figure is even

by 3 if the sum of the digits is divisible by 3
by 5 if the last figure is 0 or 5
EXERCISE 12f
Is 446 divisible by 2?
Since the last figure is even, 446 is divisible by 2.
The sum of the digits is 1+6 + 8 + 3=18, which is divisible

by 3. Therefore 1683 is divisible by 3.
Since the last digit is 5, 7235 is divisible by 5.
1. Is 525 divisible by 3? 5. Is 543 divisible by 5?

8820 is divisible by 5 since it ends in 0.
8820 is divisible by 3 since 8 + 8 + 2 = 18 which is divisible

by 3.
8820 is therefore divisible by both 5 and 3, i.e. it is divisible

by 5 X 3 or 15.
9. Is 10752 divisible by 6?
10. Is 21 168 divisible by 6?
11. Is 30870 divisible by 15?

EXPRESSING A NUMBER IN PRIME FACTORS _
To express a number in prime factors start by trying to divide by 2

and keep on until you can no longer divide exactly by 2. Next try 3
in the same way, then 5 and so on for each prime number until you
are left with 1.
Express each of the following numbers in prime factors:
3. 63 7. 216 9. 405
2. 28 4. 72 8. 528 10. 784
HIGHEST COMMON FACTOR (HCF)-
The highest common factor of two or more numbers is the largest

number that divides exactly into each of them.
For example 8 is the HCF of 16 and 24
and 15 is the HCF of 45, 60 and 120.
EXERCISE 12h State the HCF of:
1. 9, 12 5. 25, 50, 75 9; 25, 35, 50, 60
8, 16 6. 22, 33, 44 12; 36, 44, 52, 56
3. 12, 24 21, 42, 84 11: 15, 30, 45, 60
4. 14, 42 8. 39, 13, 26 H; 10, 18, 20, 36

LOWEST COMMON MULTIPLE (LCM)
The lowest eommon multiple of two or more numbers is the smallest

number that divides exactly by each of the numbers. For example the
LCM of 8 and 12 is 24 since both 8 and 12 divide exactly into 24.
Similarly the LCM of 4, 6 and 9 is 36.
EXERCISE 12i State the LCM of:

1. 3, 5 ^ 3, 9, 12 9. 9, 12, 18
2. 6, 8 6. 10, 15, 20 10. 18, 27, 36
3. 5, 15 7. 12, 16, 24 ytC 9,12,36
4. 9, 12 8. 4, 5, 6 12. 6, 7, 8
PROBLEMS INVOLVING HCFs AND LCMs
EXERCISE 12j What is the smallest sum of money that can be made up of an
exact number of 20 p pieces or of 50 p pieces?
Find the least sum of money into which 24 p, 30 p and 54 p will

” divide exactly.
3. Find the smallest length that can be divided exactly into equal
” sections of length 5 m or 8 m or 12 m.
A room measures 450 cm by 350 cm. Find the side of the largest
square tile that can be used to tile the floor without any cutting.
5. The light at one light-house flashes every 8 seconds while the

~ light at another light-house flashes every 15 seconds. They flash
together at midnight. What is the time when they next flash
together?
6. Two cars travel around a Scalextric track, the one completing

~ the circuit in 6 seconds and the other in 63 seconds. If they leave
the starting line together how long will it be before they are
again side by side?
A gear wheel with 30 teeth drives another wheel with 65 teeth. A

certain pair of teeth are touching when the wheels start. How
many times must each wheel turn before the same two teeth
touch each other again?
8. If I go up a flight of stairs two at a time I get to the top without

any being left over. If I then try three at a time and again five at
a time, I still get to the top without any being left over. Find the
shortest flight of stairs for which this is possible. How many
would remain if I were to go up seven at a time?
9. Three bells toll at intervals of 12 seconds, 15 seconds and

” 18 seconds. If they sound in unison at 10 a.m., how long will it be
before they sound together again?
In the first year of a large comprehensive school it is possible to

divide the pupils into equal sizes classes of either 24 or 30 or 32
and have no pupils left over. Find the sized of the smallest entry
that makes this possible. How many classes will there be if each
class is to have 24 pupils?
3 tables and networks
TWO-WAY TABLES
Information that would take a great deal of space if it were listed is

often stored in tables.
EXERCISE 13a
This table shows the cost of a coach journey to various
places on different days of the week.
Mon. to Thurs. Fri. Sat. Sun.
1
London £4.60 £5.50 £5.80 £4.00
Alton Towers £3.50 £3,50 £4.50 £5.00
Birmingham £5,00 £5.00 £5.50 £4.80
a) What is the cost of a journey to Alton Towers on a

Saturday?
b) What is the cost of five journeys to London, one on

each weekday?
a) (Look along the line for Alton Towers until you get to
the column for Saturday.)
The cost is £4.50
b) Cost for Monday to Thursday = 4 x £4.60
= £18.40
Cost for Friday = £5.50
Total cost = £23.90
1. Use the information in the worked example above to find the cost
of the following sets of journeys.
a) Four journeys to Birmingham on Sunday.
b) Two journeys to London on Saturday and two journeys to

Alton Towers on Tuesday.
188
Tables and Networks 189
c) One journey on each day of the week (including weekends) to

Birmingham.
d) I paid £9.30 for two journeys. What might be the two

destinations?
2. The table below shows the yearly premiums for insuring house
contents in different areas.
The size of the premium depends on the value of the contents and
also on the type of area (for example whether there are many
burglaries in the area or whether there is a likelihood of flooding.)
House cont ents insurana2 premiums
Sum insured Area 1 Area 2 Area 3
£4000 £46 £40 £35
£5000 £57 £49 £44
£6000 £68 £59 £52
£7000 £79 £68 £61
£8000 £90 £78 £70
Give the premium for insuring house contents
a) of value £5000 in Area 2
b) of value £7000 in Area 3
c) Mr Jones’ premium is £52. What is the value of his house

contents? What area is the house in?
d) Mrs Silcocks’ premium is £68. What is the value of her house

contents? What area is her house in?
e) The Feathers live in Area 3 and their house contents are valued
at £5000. The difference between the Feathers’ insurance and
that of the Drews is £15.
What is the value of the Drews’ house contents and which area
do they live in?
f) The Martins and the Barkers live in Area 1. Their combined

premiums come to £147. The Martins pay more than the
Barkers.
What sums do they each insure?
EXERCISE 13b
The pupils in a class were each asked how many girls and
boys there were in their family. This table shows the results
of the enquiries.
Number of girls
0 1 2 3
0 0 4 0
5
Number j
of bovs
3 7 © 0
2 4 4 0
a) How many families are there with 2 girls and 1 boy?

b) How many families are there with 3 girls?
a) (Look down the column for 2 girls until you reach the
row with 1 boy.)
There are 3 families with 2 girls and 1 boy.
b) (There could be 0, 1 or 2 boys in the family.)

There are 1 + 1+0 families with 3 girls, i.e. 2 families.
1. This question refers to the table in the worked example above.
a) How many families are there with 2 boys and 1 girl?

b) How many families are there with 1 girl and any number of
boys?
c) How many families are there with at least 1 boy?
d) How many families are there altogether?
e) Why must the entry for 0 girls and 0 boys be zero?
2. The pupils in a class were each asked to give their hair and eye
colour. This table shows the results.
Eye colour
Blue 1 Grey | Dark Hazel
Dark 1 2 10 2
Hair Medium 4 2 1 0
colour -
Fair 5 1 0 1
Red 0 1 0 0
a) How many pupils have fair hair and grey eyes?
b) How many pupils have dark hair?
e) How many pupils are there in the class?
3. A study was made of the number of cars and garages owned by

each household in a street. This table shows the results.
Cars
0 1 2 3
0 7 5 1 0
I 3 9 1 0
2 0 0 1 1
a) How many households have 1 car and 1 garage?
b) How many households have 2 cars and 2 garages?
c) How many households have 1 car?
d) How many households are there altogether in the street?
e) How many cars altogether are owned by the householders in

this street?
4. This table shows the various numbers of daily and evening papers
taken by the households in one street. There are 32 households
altogether and 16 have no evening paper.
Daily paper
0 1 2
0 9 3
Evening
paper
1 6 1
a) Copy and complete the table.
b) How many households have 1 daily paper and 1 evening

paper?
c) How many households have 2 daily papers and no evening

paper?
NETWORKS
A network gives information about how a number of points are

connected.
EXERCISE 13c 1.
This road map shows distances between villages.
a) How far is it from A to B?
b) How far is it from A to C via F?
c) What is the distance from A to C if you go via B?
d) Find the distance from A to C via F and D.
e) Find another possible route from A to C and give the distance.
f) Which is the shortest route from A to C?
2. <r^ Daisy's house
This is the map of a village with some of the buildings and the
distances between them shown.
a) Pete decided to walk from his home to Daisy’s house. He went
past the Post Office, the shop and the school.
How far did he walk?
h) At the same time, Daisy set off to visit Pete. She went past the
church and the Post Office to Pete’s house.
How far did she walk?
c) Pete and Daisy missed each other. They both set off to walk
back and met halfway between the Post Office and the school.
How far had Pete walked altogether?
3. On another day, Pete and Daisy set off from Pete’s house and
walked past the Post Office, the church, Daisy’s house, the school
and the shop and back to the Post Office.
a) How far did they walk?
b) Is there any section of road along which they did not walk?
4. a) On Monday, the postman collects the post from the Post

Office as usual. He finds that he has letters to deliver to the
school, the shop and Daisy’s house, before returning to the
Post Office.
Plan a route for him so that he walks as short a distance as
possible. Give the distance he walks.
b) On Tuesday, the postman has letters for Daisy and Pete.

Plan a route for him and give the distance he walks.
This road map shows the distances in miles between towns.
a) How far is it from A to C?
b) How far is it from A to D via B?
c) How far is it from A to D if you call at B and then C on the

way?
d) Find the shortest route from A to D.
e) What is the next shortest route from A to D?

6. c
This map shows the times it takes to cycle along the various
roads.
a) How long does it take to go directly from C to B?
b) How long does it take to go from A to B via E?
c) Find a quicker route for getting from A to B.
d) Find the quickest route from B to D.
DRAWING NETWORKS
EXERCISE 13d 1. Copy this diagram without lifting your pen or pencil from the
paper and without going over any line again. Start at A.
Try starting at B. Is the drawing still possible?
Now try starting at C.
2. Draw each of the following diagrams in the same way as in

question I.
Start each one at the point labelled A.
3. At least one of the following diagrams cannot be drawn without

lifting your pen from the paper or going over any line again.
Find which can be drawn in one go and which cannot.
4. The following diagrams can be copied in one go if you choose

your starting point carefully.
In each case
a) name the points you could start from in order to complete a

drawing in one go.
b) name starting points that do not allow you to do the drawing

in one go.
5. Make a network drawing of your own showing some of the roads

near the school or near where you live.
Can your network be drawn without lifting pen from paper?
6. On every drawing done for this exercise, write by each point the
number of lines that meet there.
For example, this is the drawing

for question 3(c).
Use this evidence to find the rules for deciding whether a

diagram can be drawn in one go and for choosing a suitable
starting point.
Draw some networks of your own and test out your rules on
them.
MIXED QUESTIONS
EXERCISE 13e 1. ABC This drawing shows part of a

board game, marked with circles
and lines.
There is a pile of counters on
each circle; for example, there are
7 counters on D and 4 on F.
Move from A to I along the lines, on the way picking up as many

counters as possible from the circles you pass. You may not pass
through a circle which has no counters left.
An example is ABCEI which gives 2 + 2 + 5 + 1 + 3, i.e.

13 counters.
a) Describe another route from A to I by giving the letters of the

circles you pass. How many counters have you collected this
time?
b) Find the route that gives the most counters.
2.
This map shows the times it takes to travel from point to point.
a) Find the quickest route from start to finish and give the time
taken.
b) Find the route from start to finish which takes the longest time
(without travelling along any road twice). Give the time it
takes.
c) Find the quickest route from start to finish that passes through
B, C, D and E in any order. Give the time it takes.
3.
This is a simplified version of the map of Pete and Daisy’s village.
a) Can the diagram be drawn in one go? Try starting first from
D, then from P.
Try other starting points. Write down what you find out.
b) The postman, starting from O, has letters for C, D, H, P and

S. Can he deliver the letters and return to O without walking
along any bit of road twice?
This map shows where clues are hidden for a treasure hunt.
a) Is it possible to collect all the clues in order without going

back to any of the hiding places a second time?
b) By chance George went straight from clue 2 to clue 4. When he

got to the treasure he realized that he needed a copy of clue 3.
Can he collect this clue and return to the treasure without
paying a second visit to any of the hiding places.
c) The direct path from clue 3 to clue 4 is flooded, though it is

still possible to cross it to get from clue 5 to the treasure. Is it
possible to get round the course now without going back to
any of the hiding places a second time?
ROUTE TABLES
A table that shows the number of direct routes between points is

called a route table.
EXERCISE 13f1. The diagram shows routes between points. The arrow indicates
that the road is one-way, i.e. you can go directly from A to B but
not from B to A. The other roads can be travelled in either
direction and there are two roads direct from A to C.
To
A B C D
A 0 1 2 0
B 0
■ Copy and complete the table, which shows the number of direct
routes between the various points.
2. Make a route table for each of the following maps.
Notice that in (c) there are two routes from A to A because you
can go either way round the loop.
3. Draw a road map from the given route table.

To
A B C
A 0 2 1
B 2 0 1
C 1 1 0
Two different maps are possible.
There are no one-way routes in this map. How can you tell this
by looking at the table?
4. Draw a road map for each of the following tables.

a) To c) To
A B c A B c
A 0 1 0 A 1 1 1
From B 1 0 1 From B 1 0 1
C 0 1 0 C 1 1 0
b) To d) To
A B C A B C D
A 0 0 2 A 0 1 0 0
From B 1 0 1 From B 1 0 2 0
C 2 1 0 C 0 2 0 1
D 0 0 I 0
USING NETWORKS
Besides information about distances, networks can be used to give

information about connections or relationships.
Ruth
Susan
To get information from this diagram you need to know what the line
with the arrow means.
In this case it means “is older than”, so if you start at the name Ruth
and follow the line to Andrew you will read it as “Ruth is older than
Andrew”.
We can also see that Ruth is older than Susan and Susan is older than
Andrew, so it follows that Ruth is the oldest, Andrew is the youngest
and Susan is in the middle.
EXERCISE 13g
In this network, the line
with the arrow means “is a
multiple of”.
a) Is 6 a multiple of 3?
b) Is 9 a multiple of 2?
a) 6 is a multiple of 3 (there is an arrow from 6 to 3)
b) 9 is not a multiple of 2 (there is no arrow from 9 to 2)
In this network, the line with the arrow means “is a parent of”.
a) Who is Anne’s parent? Dawn
b) Is Gary the parent of Dawn?
c) What relation is Dawn to Gary
Anne? David
d) What relation is David to Gary?

•Anne
e) What relation is Anne to Gary?
Ian
2. The line with the arrow means “is older than
a) Who is the oldest of the four?

Sally*' Annnia
b) Is Ian older or younger than
Angela?
c) Is James younger than Ian?

James
d) Suppose we are now told that Ian is older than James. Copy
the diagram and add a line with an arrow to show this.
e) Is Sally older than Angela? If she is, add a line with an arrow
to the diagram to show this.
3. This network shows the relationship “is a factor of”. (There is a

bridge on the line joining 2 to 4 to avoid the line from 3 to 12.)
a) According to this diagram,

what are the factors of 12?
b) Does 4 have a factor?
c) There are two lines missing.

Copy the diagram and add the
missing lines.
4. This time the arrow means “is a brother of”.
Tom
a) What is the difference between this and the other networks?

Why does this one have to be marked in a different way?
b) Do all three belong to the same family?
5. The arrow means “is a cousin of”.
Philip
Sarah
a) Write down the relationship between Philip and Martin.
b) What do you know about Sarah?
c) Angela is Sarah’s cousin but no relation of the other three.

Copy and complete the diagram.
AREA
COUNTING SQUARES
The area of a shape or figure is the amount of surface enclosed within

the lines which bound it. Below, six letters have been drawn on
squared paper.
We can see, by counting squares, that the area of the letter E is

15 squares.
EXERCISE 14a What is the area of:
1. The letter T?
2. The letter H?
202
Area 203
Sometimes the squares do not fit exactly on the area we are finding.
When this is so we count a square if at least half of it is within the area
we are finding, but exclude it if more than half of it is outside.
By counting squares in this way the approximate area of the letter A

is 13 squares.
What is the approximate area of:
3. The letter P?
4. The letter O?
The next set of diagrams shows the outlines of three leaves.
By counting squares find the approximate area of:
5. The leaf outline marked A.
6. The leaf outline marked B.
7. The leaf outline marked C.
8. Which leaf has
a) the largest area b) the smallest area?

Area 205
UNITS OF AREA
There is nothing special about the size of square we have used. If

other people are going to understand what we are talking about when
we say that the area of a certain shape is 12 squares, we must have a
square or unit of area which everybody understands and which is
always the same.
A metre is a standard length and a square with sides 1 m long is said

to have an area of one square metre. We write one square metre
as 1 m^. Other agreed lengths such as millimetres, centimetres and
kilometres, are also in use. The unit of area used depends on what we
are measuring.
We could measure the area of a small coin in square millimetres

(mm^), the area of the page of a book in square centimetres (cm^),
the area of a roof in square metres (m^) and the area of a county in
square kilometres (km^).
AREA OF A SQUARE
4 cm
The square is the simplest figure of

which to find the area. If we have
a square whose side is 4 cm long it
is easy to see that we must have
16 squares, each of side 1 cm, to
cover the given square.
i.e. the area of a square of side 4 cm is 16cm^
AREA OF A RECTANGLE
If we have a rectangle measuring

6 cm by 4 cm we require 4 rows
each containing 6 squares of side
1 cm to cover this rectangle.
i.e. the area of the rectangle = 6x4 cm^

= 24 cm^
A similar result can then be found

for a rectangle of any size; for
example a rectangle of length 4 cm
and breadth 2jcm has an area of
4 X 2jcm^.
In general, for any rectangle
Area = length x breadth
EXERCISE 14b Find the area of each of the following shapes, clearly stating the units
involved:
1. A square of side 2 cm
5. A square of side 1.5 cm
7. A square of side 0.7 m
9. A square of side j km
10. A square of side |m
11. A rectangle measuring 5 cm by 6 cm
13. A rectangle measuring 3 m by 9 m
15. A rectangle measuring 1.8 mm by 2.2 mm
16. A rectangle measuring 35 km by 42 km
17. A rectangle measuring 1.5 m by 1.9 m
18. A rectangle measuring 4.8 cm by 6.3 cm
20. A rectangle measuring 150 mm by 240 mm

Area 207
COMPOUND FIGURES
EXERCISE 14c Frequently it is possible to find the area of a figure by dividing it into
two or more rectangles.
Find the areas of the following figures by dividing them into

rectangles;
4 cm
4 cm
A
6 cm
6 cm
B 2 cm
1_
Area of A = 6 x 4 cm^ = 24 cm^
Area of B = 6x2cm^ = 12cm^
Therefore area of whole figure = 24cm^ + 12cm^ == 36 cm^.
12 cm
Area 209
EXERCISE 14d Find the perimeter of each shape given in Exercise 14b, clearly
indicating units.
If we are given a rectangle whose perimeter is 22 cm and told that the

length of the rectangle is 6 cm it is possible to find its breadth and its
area.
6 cm
Breadth Breadth
6 cm
The two lengths add up to 12 cm

so the two breadths add up to (22-12) cm = 10 cm.
Therefore the breadth is 5 cm.
The area of this rectangle = 6x5 cm^
= 30 cm^
EXERCISE 14e The following table gives some of the measurements for various
rectangles. Fill in the values that are missing;
Length Breadth Perimeter Area
1. 4 cm 12 cm
2. 5 cm 14cm
3. 3m 16m
4. 6 mm 30 mm
5. 6 cm 30 cm^
6. 10m 120m^
7. 4 km 36 km^
8. 7 mm 63 mm^
9. 5 cm 60 cm
10. 21 cm 1680cm2
PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 14f Find for each of the following figures

a) the perimeter b) the area.
it
X 8 cm .1
2 cm A 2 cm !
3 cm 3 cm i
5 cm B 5 cm
3 cm 3 cm
1 3 cm C 3 cm
1 8 cm
'j
a) Starting at X, the distance all round the figure and back to X \

■ i
IS ;
8-|-2-f 3-f 5 + 3-f 3 + 8 "b 3 ~b 3 + 5-f 3 + 2 cm = 48 cm. i
il
Therefore the perimeter is 48 cm. p
b) Divide the figure into three rectangles A, B and C. |
Then the area of A = 8x2cm^ = 16cm^ P
the area of B = 5 x 2cm^ = lOcm^
and the area of C = 8 x 3cm^ = 24 cm^ j
Therefore the total area = (16+10 + 24)cm^ = 50cm^ ji
9 r'm
EXERCISE 14g
Draw a square of side 6 cm. How many squares of side 2 cm
are required to cover it?
2 cm
2 cm
6 cm
We see that 9 squares of side 2 cm are required to cover the

larger square whose side is 6 cm.
1. Draw a square of side 4 cm. How many squares of side 2 cm are

required to cover it?
2. Draw a square of side 9 cm. How many squares of side 3 cm are

required to cover it?
3. Draw a rectangle measuring 6 cm by 4 cm. How many squares of

side 2 cm are required to cover it?
4. Draw a rectangle measuring 9 cm by 6 cm. How many squares of

side 3 cm are required to cover it?
5. How many squares of side 5 cm are required to cover a rectangle

measuring 45 cm by 25 cm?
6. How many squares of side 4 cm are required to cover a rectangle

measuring 1 m by 80 cm?
Area 213
CHANGING UNITS OF AREA
A square of side 1cm may be divided into 100 equal squares of side
1 mm,
i.e. 1 cm^ = 100 mm^
1 cm |10 mm
1 cm 10 mm
Similarly since 1 m = 100 cm

1 square metre = 100 x 100 square centimetres
i.e. 1 m^ = lOOOOcm^
and as 1 km = 1000 m
1 km^ = 1000 X 1000 m^
i.e. 1 km^ = 1000 000 m^
When we convert from a unit of area which is large to a unit of area
which is smaller we must remember that the number of units will be
bigger,
e.g. 2 km^ = 2x 1 000 000 m^
= 2 000 000 m^
and 12m2 = 12x lOOOOcm^

= 120000cm^
while if we convert from a unit of area which is small into one which
is larger the number of units will be smaller,
, 500 ,
e.g. 500 mm =-cm
® 100
= 5cm^
EXERCISE 14h
Express 5m^ in a) cm^ b) mm^.
a) Since 1 m^ = 100 X lOOcm^
5m^ =5 X 100 X lOOcm^
= 50000cm^
b) Since 1 cm^ = lOOmm^
SOOOOcm^ = 50000x 100 mm^
Therefore 5m^ = 50 000 cm^ = 5 000 000 mm^.

Express in cm^:
a)3m^ c) 7.5d) 82e) 8jm^.
r. Express in mm^;
a) 14 cm* b) 3 cm^ cfy.Scm^ d) 26cm^ e) 32jcm^.
3: Express 0.056 in b^m^.

/
Express 354 000 000 mm^ in a) cm^ b) m^.
a) Since lOOmm^ = Icm^
, 354 000000 ,
354 000 000 mm^ = „ cm^
100
= 3540000cm^
b) Since lOOx lOOcm^ = 1 m^
. , 3 540000 ,
3 540 000 cm^ = m^
100X100
= 354 m^
Therefore 354 000 000 mm^ = 3 540 000 cm^ = 354 m^
4- Express in cm^:
a) 400 mm^ b) 2500 mm^ c) 50 mm^
d) 25 mm^ mm^
5./Express in m^:
a) 5500cm^ b) 140000cm^ c) 760cm^
d) 18 600cm^ e) 29 700 000 cm^
6.' Express in km^;

“ a) 7 500 000 b) 430 000 c) 50000m^
d) 245 000 e^6 000 000 .
Many questions ask us to find the area of a rectangle but give the
length and breadth in different units. When this is so we must change
the units so that all the measurements are in the same units.
Area 21 5
EXERCISE 14i
Find the area of a rectangle measuring jm by 35 cm. Give
your answer in cm^.
35 cm
i m
(Since the answer is to be given in cm^ we express both the

length and breadth in cm.)
Length of rectangle = = jx lOOcm = 50cm
Therefore area of rectangle = 50x35 cm^

= 1750cm^
Find the area of each of the following rectangles, giving your answer
in the unit in brackets:
Length Breadth
/
10m 50 cm (cm^)
2. 6 cm 30 mm (mm^)
3. 50m 35 cm (cm^)
4. 140 cm Im (cm^)
400 cm 200 cm (m^)
3m im (cm^)
7. 2im lim (cm^)
8; 1.5 cm 1.2 cm (mm^)
0.4 km 0.3 km (m^)

.-r
10. 0.45 km 0.05 km (m^)
MIXED PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 14j In questions 1 to 4 find a) the area of the playing surface

b) the perimeter of the playing surface:
1. A soccer field measuring 110 m by 75 m.
2. A rugby pitch measuring 100 m by 70 m.

3. A lacrosse pitch measuring 120 m by 70 m.
4. A tennis eourt measuring 26 m by 12 m.
5. A roll of wallpaper is 10 m long and 50 cm wide. Find its area in

square metres.
h. school hall measuring 20 m by 15 m is to be covered with

/ square floor tiles of side 50 em. How many tiles are required?
7. A reetangular carpet measures 4 m by 3 m. Find its area. How

much would it cost to clean at 75 p per square metre?
8. The top of my desk is 150 cm long and 60 cm wide. Find its

area.
/
How many square linen serviettes, of side 50 cm, may be cut
/ from a roll of linen 25 m long and 1 m wide?
10. How many square concrete paving slabs, each of side |m, are
required to pave a rectangular yard measuring 9 m by 6 m?
PARALLEL LINES AND ANGLES
PARALLEL LINES
Two straight lines that are always the same distance apart, however far they
are drawn, are called parallel lines.
The lines in your exercise books are parallel. You can probably find many
other examples of parallel lines.
EXERCISE 15a 1. Using the lines in your exercise book, draw three lines that are parallel.
Do not make them all the same distance apart. For example
>
(We use arrows to mark lines
> that are parallel.)
>
2. Using the lines in your exercise book, draw two parallel lines.
Make them fairly far apart. Now draw a slanting line across
them. For example
Mark the angles in your drawing that are in the same position as
those in the diagram. Are they acute or obtuse angles? Measure
your angles marked p and q.
3. Draw a grid of parallel lines like the diagram below. Use the lines
in your book for one set of parallels and use the two sides of
your ruler to draw the slanting parallels.
Mark your drawing like the diagram. Are your angles p and q
acute or obtuse? Measure your angles p and q.
217
4. Repeat question 3 but change the direction of your slanting lines.
5. Draw three slanting parallel lines like the diagram below with a
horizontal line cutting them. Use the two sides of your ruler and
move it along to draw the third parallel line.
Mark your drawing like the diagram. Decide whether angles s, t

and u are acute or obtuse and then measure them.
6. Repeat question 5 but change the slope of your slanting lines.
CORRESPONDING ANGLES
In the exercise above, lines were drawn that crossed a set of parallel
lines.
A line that crosses a set of parallel lines is called a transversal.
When you have drawn several parallel lines you should notice that
two parallel lines on the same flat surface will never meet
however far they are drawn.
If you draw the diagram above by moving your ruler along you can
see that all the shaded angles are equal. These angles are all in
corresponding positions: they are all above the transversal and to the
left of the parallel lines. Angles like these are called corresponding
angles.
When two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, the

corresponding angles are equal.
DRAWING PARALLEL LINES (USING A PROTRACTOR)
The fact that the corresponding angles are equal gives us a method
for drawing parallel lines.
If you need to draw a line

through the point C that is
parallel to the line AB, first
draw a line through C to cut
AB.
Use your protractor to

measure the shaded angle.
Place your protractor at C as
shown in the diagram. Make
an angle at C the same size as
the shaded angle and in the
corresponding position.
You can now extend the arm of your angle both ways, to give the
parallel line.
• D
Now draw lines through the points C, D and E so that each line
is parallel to AB.
Parallel Lines and Angles 221
3. Draw a sloping line on your exercise book. Mark a point C

above the line. Use your protractor to draw a line through C
parallel to your first line.
4. Trace the diagram below.
Measure the acute angle at A. Draw the corresponding angles at

B, C and D. Extend the arms of your angles so that you have a
set of four parallel lines.
In questions 5 to 8 remember to draw a rough sketch before doing

the accurate drawing.
5. Draw an equilateral triangle with sides each 8 cm long. Label the

corners A, B and C. Draw a line through C that is parallel to the
side AB.
6. Draw an isosceles triangle ABC with base AB which is 10 cm long

and base angles at A and B which are each 30°. Draw a line
through C which is parallel to AB.
7. Draw the triangle as given in question 5 again and this time draw
a line through A which is parallel to the side BC.
8. Make an accurate drawing of the figure below where the side AB

is 7 cm, the side AD is 4 cm and A = 60°.
(A figure like this is called a parallelogram.)
>
A B
PROBLEMS INVOLVING CORRESPONDING ANGLES _
The simplest diagram for a pair of corresponding angles is an F

shape.
Looking for an F shape may help you to recognise the corresponding

angles.
EXERCISE 15d Write down the size of the angle marked d in each of the following
diagrams:
d = 60° {d and the angle of 60° are corresponding angles.)
110"
Parallel
Reminder:
Vertically opposite angles are

equal.
Angles at a point add up to

360°.
Angles on a straight line add

up to 180°
The angles of a triangle add

up to 180°.
You will need these facts in the next exereise.

EXERCISE 15e Find the size of each marked angle:

Parallel Lines and Angles
Find the size of angle d in questions 17 to 24:

ALTERNATE ANGLES
Draw a large letter Z. Use the lines of your exercise book to make
sure that the outer arms of the Z are parallel.
This letter has rotational symmetry about the point marked with a
cross. This means that the two shaded angles are equal. Measure them
to make sure.
Draw a large N and make sure that the outer arms are parallel.
This letter also has rotational symmetry about the point marked with
a cross, so once again the shaded angles are equal. Measure them to
make sure.
The pairs of shaded angles like those in the Z and N are between the
parallel lines and on alternate sides of the transversal.
Angles like these are called alternate angles.
When two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, the

alternate angles are equal.
The simplest diagram for a pair of alternate angles is a Z shape.
Looking for a Z shape may help you to recognise the alternate angles.
EXERCISE 15f Write down the angle which is alternate to the shaded angle in the
following diagrams;
PROBLEMS INVOLVING ALTERNATE ANGLES
Without doing any measuring we can show that alternate angles are
equal by using the facts that we already know:
>
>
p = r because they are corresponding angles
q = r because they are vertically opposite angles
p = q and these are alternate angles

229
230 ST(P) Mathematics TA
INTERIOR ANGLES
In the diagram above, / and g are on the same side of the transversal
and “inside” the parallel lines.
Pairs of angles like / and g are called interior angles.
exercise 15h In the following diagrams, two of the marked angles are a pair of
interior angles. Name them:
In the following diagrams, use the information given to find the size
of p and of q. Then find the sum of p and q:
7. / 9.
11. Make a large copy of the diagram below. Use the lines of your
book to make sure that the outer arms of the “U” are parallel.
The sum of a pair of interior angles is 180°.
You will probably have realised this fact by now. We can show that it
is true from the following diagram.
d-\-f = 180° because they are angles on a straight line
d = e because they are alternate angles
So e+f= 180'
MIXED EXERCISES
You now know that when a transversal cuts a pair of parallel lines
the corresponding (F) angles are equal

the alternate (Z) angles are equal
the interior (U) angles add up to 180°
You can use any of these facts, together with the other angle facts
you know, to answer the questions in the following exercises.
EXERCISE Find the size of each marked angle:
9. Construct a triangle ABC in which AB = 12 cm, BC = 8 cm and

AC = 10 cm. Find the midpoint of AB and mark it D. Find the
midpoint of AC and mark it E. Join ED. Measure ADE and
ABC. What can you say about the lines DE and BC?
EXERCISE 151 Find the size of each marked angle:
5. Construct an equilateral
“ triangle with sides 7 cm long
and label it ABC. Using BC
as one side construct another
equilateral triangle BCD. Your
drawing should look like the
diagram on the right. Mark
any lines that you think are
parallel and give reasons for
your decision.
COORDINATES
PLOTTING POINTS USING POSITIVE COORDINATES
There are many occasions when you need to describe the position of an
object. For example, telling a friend how to find your house, finding a
square in the game of battleships, describing the position of an aeroplane
showing up on a radar screen. In mathematics we need a quick way to
describe the position of a point.
We do this by using squared paper and marking a point O at the corner of
one square. We then draw a line through O across the page. This line is
called Ox. Next we draw a line through O up the page. This line is called Oy.
Starting from O we then mark numbered scales on each line.
7,
5.
2,
1,
— —
0 1 23456789x
O is called the origin
Ox is called the x-axis
Oy is called the y-axis.
We can now describe the position of a point A as follows;

start from O and move 3 squares along Ox,
then move 5 squares up from Ox.
We always use the same method to describe the position of a point:
start from O, first move along and then up.
We can now shorten the description of the position of the point A to
the number pair (3, 5).
236
Coordinates 237
/-
A (3,5)
5.
4,
3 B
/ V
2
-'
1,
__ —
The number pair (3, 5) is referred to as the coordinates of A.

The first number, 3, is called the x-coordinate of A.
The second number, 5, is called the ;^-coordinate of A.
Now consider another point B
whose .Y-coordinate is 8
and whose ^-coordinate is 3.
If we simply refer to the point B(8, 3)

this tells us all that we need to know about the position of B.
The origin is the point (0, 0).
EXERCISE 16a 1. Write down the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D, E, F, G

and H.
2. Draw a set of axes of your own. Give them seales from 0 to 10.
Mark the following points and label each point with its own
letter;
A(2, 8) B(4, 9) C(7, 9) D(8, 7) E(8, 6) F(9, 4) G(8, 4)
H(7, 3) 1(5, 3) J(7, 2) K(7, 1) L(4, 2) M(2, 0) N(0, 2)
Now join your points together in alphabetical order and join A

to N.
3. Draw a set of axes and give them scales from 0 to 10. Mark the
following points:
A(2, 5) B(7, 5) C(7, 4) D(8, 4) E(8, 3) F(9, 3) G(9, 2)
H(6, 2) 1(6, 1) J(7, 1) K(7, 0) L(5, 0) M(5, 2) N(4, 2)
P(4, 0) Q(2, 0) R(2, 1) S(3, 1) T(3, 2) U(0, 2) V(0, 3)
W(l, 3) X(l, 4) Y(2, 4)
Now join your points together in alphabetical order and join A

to Y.
4. Mark the following points on your own set of axes:
A(2, 7) B(8, 7) C(8, 1) D(2, 1)
Join A to B, B to C, C to D and D to A. What is the name of

the figure ABCD?
5. Mark the following points on your own set of axes;
A(2, 2) B(8, 2) C(5, 5)
Join A to B, B to C and C to A. What is the name of the figure

ABC?
A(4, 0) B(6, 0) C(6, 4) D(4, 4)

Join A to B, B to C, C to D and D to A. What is the name of
the figure ABCD?
A(5, 2) B(8, 5) C(5, 8) D(2, 5)
Join the points to make the figure ABCD. What is ABCD?
8. On your own set of axes mark the points A(8, 4), B(8, 8) and
C(14, 6). Join A to B, B to C and C to A.
Describe the figure ABC.
Coordinates 239
9. Draw a simple pattern of your own on squared paper but do

not show it to anyone. Write down the coordinates of each
point and give this set of coordinates to your partner. See if
your partner can now draw your diagram.
Questions 10 to 15 refer to the points A(l, 7), B(5, 0) and C(0, 14):
10. Write down the x-coordinate of the point B.
11. Write down the y-coordinate of the point A.
12. Write down the x-coordinate of the point C.
13. Write down the x-coordinate of the point A.
14. Write down the y-coordinate of the point C.
15. Write down the y-coordinate of the point B.
Questions 16 to 21 refer to points in the following diagram:
16. Write down the y-coordinate of the point T.
17. Write down the x-coordinate of the point P.
18. Write down the x-coordinate of the point S.
19. Write down the y-coordinate of the point R.
20. Write down the y-coordinate of the point Q.
21. Write down the x-coordinate of the point R.

Questions 22 to 25 refer to the following diagrams:
22. Write down the coordinates of the vertices X, Y and Z of

triangle XYZ.
23. Write down the coordinates of the vertices of the isosceles

triangle PQR. Write down the lengths of the two equal sides.
24. Write down the coordinates of the vertices of the parallelogram

ABCD. How long is AB? How long is DC?
25. Write down the coordinates of the centre, L, of the circle. What
is the diameter of this circle?
For each of the following questions you will need to draw your own
set of axes:
26. The points A(2, 1), B(6, 1) and C(6, 5) are three corners of a
square ABCD. Mark the points A, B and C. Find the point D
and write down the coordinates of D.
27. The points A(2, 1), B(2, 3) and C(7, 3) are three vertices of a
rectangle ABCD. Mark the points and find the point D. Write
down the coordinates of D.
28. The points A(l, 4), B(4, 7) and C(7, 4) are three vertices of a
square ABCD. Mark the points A, B and C and find D. Write
down the coordinates of D.
Coordinates 241
29. Mark the points A(2, 4) and B(8, 4). Join A to B and find
the point C which is the midpoint (the exact middle) of the line
AB. Write down the coordinates of C.
30. Mark the points P(3, 5) and Q(3, 9). Join P and Q and mark
the point R which is the midpoint of PQ. Write down the
coordinates of R.
SI- Mark the points A(0, 5) and B(4, 1). Find the coordinates of
the midpoint of AB.
QUADRILATERALS
A quadrilateral has four sides. No two of

the sides need be equal and no two of the
sides need be parallel.
There are, however, some special quadrilaterals, such as a square,

which have some sides parallel and/or some sides equal.
ERERCISE 16b If you are not sure whether two lines are equal, measure them.
If you are not sure whether two lines are parallel, measure the
corresponding angles.
1. The Square
A(3, 2), B(ll, 2), C(ll, 10) and D(3, 10) are the four corners of
a square. Mark these points on your own set of axes and then
draw the square ABCD.
a) Write down, as a number of sides of squares, the lengths of
the sides AB, BC, CD and DA.
b) Which side is parallel to AB? Are BC and AD parallel?
c) What is the size of each angle of the square?
2. The Rectangle
A(2, 2), B(2, 7), C(14, 7) and D(14, 2) are the vertices of a
rectangle ABCD. Draw the rectangle ABCD on your own set of
axes.
a) Write down the sides which are equal in length.
b) Write down the pairs of sides which are parallel.
c) What is the size of each angle of the rectangle?
3. The Rhombus
A(8, 1), B(ll, 7), C(8, 13) and D(5, 7) are the vertices of a
rhombus ABCD. Draw the rhombus on your own set of axes.
a) Write down the sides which are equal in length.
b) Write down the pairs of sides which are parallel.
c) Measure the angles of the rhombus. Are any of the angles
equal?
4. The Parallelogram
A(2, 2), B(14, 2), C(17, 7) and D(5, 7) are the vertices of a
parallelogram. Draw the parallelogram on your own set of axes.
a) Write down which sides are equal in length.
b) Write down which sides are parallel.
c) Measure the angles of the parallelogram. Write down which, if
any, of the angles are equal.
5. The Trapezium
A(l, 1), B(12, 1), C(10, 5) and D(5, 5) are the vertices of a
trapezium. Draw the trapezium on your own set of axes.
a) Write down which, if any, of the sides are the same length.
b) Write down which, if any, of the sides are parallel.
c) Write down which, if any, of the angles are equal.
PROPERTIES OF THE SIDES AND ANGLES

OF THE SPECIAL QUADRILATERALS
We can summarize our investigations in the last exercise as follows:
In a square all four sides are the same length

both pairs of opposite sides are parallel
all four angles are right angles.
In a rectangle both pairs of opposite sides are the same

length
all four angles are right angles
In a rhombus all four sides are the same length

the opposite angles are equal.
In a parallelogram the opposite sides are the same length

the opposite sides are parallel
the opposite angles are equal,
In a trapezium just one pair of opposite sides are parallel.

Coordinates 243
EXERCISE 16c In the following questions the points A, B, C and D are the vertices
of a quadrilateral. Draw the figure ABCD on your own set of axes
and write down which type of quadrilateral it is.
1. A(2, 4) B(7, 4) C(8, 7) D(3, 7)
2. A(2, 2) B(6, 0) C(7, 2) D(3. 4)
3. A(2, 2) B(7, 2) C(5, 5) D(3, 5)
4. A(2, 0) B(6, 0) C(6, 4) D(2, 4)
5. A(l, 1) B(4, 0) C(4, 6) D(l, 3)
6. A(3, 1) B(6, 3) C(3, 5) D(0, 3)
7. A(l, 3) B(4, 1) C(6, 4) D(3, 6)
8. A(2, 4) B(3, 7) C(9, 5) D(8, 2)
9; A(3, 1) B(5, 1) C(3, 5) D(l, 5)
10; A(0, 0) B(5, 0) C(8, 4) D(3, 4)
NEGATIVE COORDINATES
If A(2, 0), B(4, 2) and C(6, 0) are three corners of a square ABCD,
we can see that the fourth corner, D, is two squares below the x-axis.
To describe the position of D we need to extend the scale on the

y-axis below zero. To do this we use the numbers
— 1, —2, —3, —4,_ These are called negative numbers.
In the same way we can use the negative numbers —1, —2, —3, . . .
to extend the scale on the x-axis to the left of zero.
The y-coordinate of the point D is written —2 and is called

“negative 2”.
The x-coordinate of the point E is written —3 and is called
“negative 3”.
The numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. . . are called positive numbers. They could

be written as +1, +2, +3, +4,. . . but we do not usually put the
+ sign in.
Now D is 4 squares to the right of O so its x-coordinate is 4
and 2 squares below the x-axis so its j-coordinate is —2,
D is the point (4, —2)
E is 3 squares to the left of O so its x-coordinate is —3
and 2 squares up from O so its y-coordinate is 2,
E is the point (—3, 2)
Use this diagram for

questions 1 and 2.
Coordinates 245
1. Write down the x-coordinate of each of the points A, B, C, D,

E, F, G, H, I, J and O (the origin).
2. Write down the ;;-coordinate of each of the points A, B, C, D,

E, H, I and J.
The point Q has a j^-coordinate of —10. How many

squares above or below the x-axis is the point Q?
Q is 10 squares below the x-axis.
How many squares above or below the x-axis is each of the following
points?
3. P: the y-coordinate is —5
i- B: the j-coordinate is 10
4. L; the y-coordinate is -1-3 7. A: the y-coordinate is 0
5. M: the jr-coordinate is —1 8. D: the j-coordinate is —4
How many squares to the left or to the right of the j-axis is each of
the following points?
9. Q: the x-coordinate is 3 1^. S: the x-coordinate is —7
10. R: the x-coordinate is -5 13; V: the x-coordinate is 0
11. T: the x-coordinate is -1-2 14. G: the x-coordinate is —9
Write down the coordinates i—

y‘
of the point A.
3.
2
1,
_J _ ,
5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - ro ) )C
A is the point (—4, 2).

15. Write down the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I and J.
4,
Jl
H
'
0
I B,
■
Mm h
5- 4 - 2 -
I 1
; ' n
F C
2
3
-1
E 1^
-5
In questions 16 to 21 draw your own set of axes and scale each one
from —5 to 5:
16. Mark the points A(—3, 4) B(—1, 4) C(l, 3) D(l, 2)

E(-l, 1) F(l, 0) G(l, -1) H(-l, -2) I(-3, -2).
Join the points in alphabetical order and join I to A.
17. Mark the points A(4, -1) B(4, 2) C(3, 3) D(2, 3) E(2, 4)
F(l, 4) G(l, 3) H(-2, 3) I(-3, 2) J(-3, -1).
Join the points in alphabetical order and join J to A.
18. Mark the points A(2, 1) B(—1, 3) C(—3, 0) D(0, —2).
Join the points to make the figure ABCD. What is the name of the
figure?
19. Mark the points A(l, 3) B(—1, —1) C(3, —1).
Join the points to make the figure ABC and describe ABC.
20. Mark the points A(-2, -1) B(5, -1) C(5, 2) D(-2, 2).
Join the points to make the figure ABCD and describe ABCD.
21. Mark the points A(—3, 0) B(l, 3) C(0, —4).
What kind of triangle is ABC?

Coordinates 247
EXERCISE 16e Draw your own set of axes for each question in this exercise. Mark a
scale on each axis from —10 to +10.
In questions 1 to 10 mark the points A and B and then find the

length of the line AB:
1. A(2, 2) B( -4, 2) A(5, - 1) B(5, 6)

2. A(-2, -1) B(6, -1) 7. A(--2, 4) B(-7, 4)
3. A(-4, -4) B(-4, 2) A(- 1, -2) B(-8, -2)
i-
4. A(l, - 6) B(l, -8) 9; A(- 3, 5) B(-3, -6)
5. A(3, 2) B(fi, 2) A(- 2, -4) B(-2, 7)
In questions 11 to 20, the points A, B and C are three corners of a square

ABCD. Mark the points and find the point D. Give the coordinates of D;
11. A(l, 1) B(l, -1) C(-l, -1)
12. A(l, 3) B(6, 3) C(6, -2)
13. A(3, 3) B(3, -1) C(-l, -1)
14. A(-2, -1) B(-2, 3) C(-6, 3)
15. A(-5, -3) B(-l, -3) C(-l, 1)
1£. A(-3, -1) B(-3, 2) C(0, 2)
17. A(0, 4) B(-2, 1) C(l, -1)
18. A(l, 0) B(3, 2) C(l, 4)
1^ A(-2, -1) B(2, -2) C(3, 2)
20. A(-3, -2) B(-5, 2) C(-l, 4)
In questions 21 to 30, mark the points A and B and the point C, the
midpoint of the line AB. Give the coordinates of C:
21. A(2, 2) B(6, 2) 26. A(2, 1) B(6, 2)

22. A(2, 3) B(2, -5) 27. A(2, 1) B( -4, 5)
23. A(--1, 3) B(-6, 3) 28; A(-7, -3) B(5, 3)
24. A(--3, 5) B(-3, -7) 29. A(-3, 3) B(3, -3)
25. A(--1, - 2) B(-9, -2) 30; A(-7, -3) B(5, 3)

STRAIGHT LINES
EXERCISE 16f 1.
The points A, B, C, D and E are all on the same straight line.

a) Write down the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D and E.
b) F is another point on the same line. The x-coordinate of F is 5.
Write down the j^-coordinate of F.
c) G, H, I, J, K, L and M are also points on this line. Fill in the
missing coordinates:
G(8, □) H(10, □) I(-4, □) !(□, 12) K(n, 18)

L(n, -10) M(n, □).
2.
Coordinates 249
The points A, B, C, D, E, F and G are all on the same straight

line.
a) Write down the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D, E, F

and G.
b) How is the j-coordinate of each point related to its
x-coordinate?
e) H is another point on this line. Its x-coordinate is 8; what is
its ^-coordinate?
d) I, J, K, L, M, N are further points on this line. Fill in the
missing coordinates:
1(12, □) J(20, □) K(30, □) L(-12, □) M(n, 9) N(fl, □).
The points A, B, C, D, E, F and G are all on the same straight

line.
a) Write down the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D, E, F

and G.
b) H, I, J, K, L, M, N, P and Q are further points on the same
line. Fill in the missing coordinates:
H(7, □) 1(10, □) J(12, □) K(20, □) L(-7, □)
m(-9, □) N(n, 10) p(n, -8) Q(n, 12).
EXERCISE 16g In the following questions we are going to investigate the properties of
the diagonals of the special quadrilaterals. You will need your own set
of axes for each question. Mark a scale on each axis from —5 to +5.
Mark the points A, B, C and D and join them to form the
quadrilateral ABCD.
1. A(5, -2) B(2, 4) C(-3, 4) D(0, -2)

a) What type of quadrilateral is ABCD?
b) Join A to C and B to D. These are the diagonals of the
quadrilateral. Mark with an E the point where the diagonals
cross.
c) Measure the diagonals. Are they the same length?
d) Is E the midpoint of either, or both, of the diagonals?
e) Measure the four angles at E. Do the diagonals cross at right
angles?
Now repeat question 1 for the following points:
2. A(2, -2) B(2, 4) C(-4, 4) D(-4, -2)
3. A(2, -2) B(5, 4) C(-3, 4) D(-l, -2)
4. A(2, 0) B(0, 4) C(-2, 0) D(0, -4)
5. A(l, -4) B(l, -1) C(-5, -1) D(-5, -4)
6. Name the quadrilaterals in which the two diagonals are of equal

length.
7. Name the quadrilaterals in which the diagonals cut at right

angles.
8. Name the quadrilaterals in which the diagonals cut each other in

half.
CURVES
So far we have looked at straight lines but many relationships give

curves.
On the opposite page is a simple example.
EXERCISE 16h Use the curve opposite to answer questions 1 to 12.
Write down the coordinates of the following points.
1. A 3. C 5. D
2. B 4. O 6. E
7. What is the connection between the y-coordinate and the

x-coordinate of each point?
8. If the x-coordinate of a point is 3, what is its y-coordinate?
9. If the x-coordinate of a point is —2, what is its j^-coordinate?
10. If the x-coordinate of a point is 2.5, what is its y-coordinate?
11. Use the curve to find the value of 1.5 x 1.5
12. If the y-coordinate of a point is 7, what is its x-coordinate? (You

will only be able to give a rough answer. Do the best you can.)
DIRECTED NUMBERS
USE OF POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE NUMBERS
Positive and negative numbers are collectively known as directed

numbers.
Directed numbers can be used to describe any quantity that can be

measured above or below a natural zero. For example, a distance of
50 m above sea level and a distance of 50 m below sea level could be
written as +50m and —50 m.
They can also be used to describe time before and after a particular
event. For example, 5 seconds before the start of a race and 5 seconds
after the start of a race could be written as — 5 s and + 5 s.
Directed numbers can also be used to describe quantities that involve

one of two possible directions. For example, if a car is travelling
north at 70 km/h and another car is travelling south at 70 km/h they
can be described as going at +70 km/h and —70 km/h.
A familiar use of negative numbers is to describe temperatures. The

freezing point of water is 0° centigrade (or Celsius) and a temperature
of 5 °C below freezing point is written — 5 °C.
Most people would call — 5°C “minus 5°C” but we will call it
“negative 5 °C” and there are good reasons for doing so because in
mathematics “minus” means “take away”.
A temperature of 5 °C above freezing point is called “positive 5 °C”

and can be written as +5°C. Most people would just call it 5°C and
write it without the positive symbol.
A number without any symbol in front of it is a positive

number,
i.e. 2 means +2
and +3 can be written as 3
EXERCISE 17a Draw a centigrade thermometer and mark a scale on it from —10°
to +10°. Use your drawing to write the following temperatures as
positive or negative numbers:
1. 10° above freezing point 4. 5° above zero
2. 7° below freezing point 8° below zero
3. 3° below zero 6. freezing point
253
Write down, in words, the meaning of the following temperatures:
7. -2°C m -10°C
8. + 3°C 11- + 8°C
9. 4°C 12. o°c
Which temperature is higher?
13. + 8° or +10°
1®: -2° or -5°
O
14. 12° or 3° !£;
o
<-•
1
15. -2° or +4° 20. + 3° or -5°
16. -3° or -5° ZL -7° or -10°
17. -8° or 2° 22; -2° or -9°
23. The contour lines on the map below show distances above sea
level as positive numbers and distances below sea level as
negative numbers.
Write down in words the position relative to sea level of the

points A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H.
In questions 24 to 34 use positive or negative numbers to describe the

quantities.
A ball thrown up a distance of 5 m.
+ 5m
24. 5 seconds before blastoff of a rocket.
25. 5 seconds after blastoff of a rocket.
26. 50 p in your purse.
27. 50 p owed.
28. 1 minute before the train leaves the station.

Directed Numbers 255
29. A win of £50 on premium bonds.
30. A debt of £5.
31. Walking forwards five paces.
32. Walking backwards five paces.
33. The top of a hill which is 200 m above sea level.
34. A ball thrown down a distance of 5 m.
35. At midnight the temperature was — 2°C. One hour later it was
1° colder. What was the temperature then?
36. At midday the temperature was 18 °C. Two hours later it was
3° warmer. What was the temperature then?
37. A rockclimber started at +200m and came a distance of 50 m

down the rock face. How far above sea level was he then?
38. At midnight the temperature was — 5 °C. One hour later it was
2° warmer. What was the temperature then?
39. At the end of the week my financial state could be described as

— 25p. I was later given 50 p. How could I then describe my
financial state?
40. Positive numbers are used to describe a number of paces

forwards and negative numbers are used to describe a number of
paces backwards. Describe where you are in relation to your
starting point if you walk +10 paces followed by -4 paces.
EXTENDING THE NUMBER LINE
If a number line is extended beyond zero, negative numbers can be

used to describe points to the left of zero and positive numbers are
used to describe points to the right of zero.
On this number line, 5 is to the right of 3

and we say that 5 is greater than 3
or 5 > 3
Also —2 is to the right of —4

and we say that —2 is greater than -4
or -2 > -4
So “greater” means “higher up the scale”.

(A temperature of — 2°C is higher than a temperature of — 4°C.)
Now 2 is to the left of 6

and we say that 2 is less than 6
or 2 < 6
Also — 3 is to the left of — 1

and we say that — 3 is less than — 1
or -3 < -1
So “less than” means “' )wer down the scale”.
EXERCISE 17b Draw a number line.

In questions 1 to 12 write either > or < between the two numbers:
1. 3 2 5. 1 -2 9; -3 -9
2. 5 1 6. -4 1 10; -7 3
3. -1 -4 7. 3 -2 11- -1 0
4. -3 -1 8. 5 -10 12; 1 -1
In questions 13 to 24 write down the next two numbers in the

sequence:
13. 4, 6, 8 17. 9, 6, 3 21^ 36, 6, 1
14. -4, -6, - 8 18. -4, -1, 2 -10, -8, -6
15. 4, 2, 0 19. 5, 1, -3 23; -1, -2, -4
16. -4, -2, 0 20. 2, 4, 8 24. 1, 0, -1
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF POSITIVE NUMBERS
If you were asked to work out 5 — 7 you would probably say that it
cannot be done. But if you were asked to work out where you would
be if you walked 5 steps forwards and then 7 steps backwards, you
would say that you were two steps behind your starting point.
•-—-
■ ■ I I_I_I_I_I-1-1-1--1—
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
•---1
On the number line, 5 — 7 means

start at 0 and go 5 places to the right
and then go 7 places to the left
So s ~ 1 = -2
i.e. “minus” a positive number means move to the left

and “plus” a positive number means move to the right.
In this way 3 + 2 —8 + 1 can be shown on the number line as follows:
-1-1-1--1-1-1_III!_|_
-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Therefore 3 + 2 —8+1 = —2.
EXERCISE 17c Find, using a number line if it helps:
1. 3-6 6. 5+2
2. 5-2 7. -2 + 3
3. 4-6 8. -3 + 5
4. 5-7 9. -5-7
5. 4-2 10. -3 + 2
(+4) + ( + 3)
( + 4) + ( + 3) = 4 + 3
= 7 ;
( + 4)-( + 3)
( + 4)-( + 3) = 4-3
= 1
11. ( + 3) + ( + 2) 14. -(+3) + (+2)
12. ( + 2)-( + 4) 15. -(+l)-(+5)
13. ( + 5)-( + 7) 16. 5-2 + 3

17. 7-9 + 4 -3-4 + 2
18. 5-11+3 25. -2-3 + 9
19. 10-4-9 ( + 3) + ( + 4)-(+l)
20. 3 + 6-10 27. ( + 2)-( + 5) + ( + 6)
21. -4+2+5 28; ( + 9)-( + 7)-( + 2)
22. -3+1-4
M; -( + 3) + ( + 5)-( + 5)
23. 5-6-9 -( + 8)-( + 4) + ( + 7)
What number does x represent if x+2 = 1 ?
— 1+2 is 1
so X = —I
Find the value of x:
31. x+4 = 5 3+x = 1
32. X —2 = 0 5—X = 4
33. x+2 = 4 38. 5+x = 7
34. x+2 = 0 9-x = 4
35. 2+X = 1 40. x-6 = 10
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF NEGATIVE NUMBERS
Most of you will have some money of your own, from pocket money
and other sources. Many of you will have borrowed money at some
time.
At any one time you have a balance of money, i.e. the total sum that
you own or owe!
If you own £2 and you borrow £4, your balance is a debt of £2.
We can write this as
( + 2) + (-4) = (-2)
or as 2 + (—4) = —2
But 2-4 = -2
+ {—4) means -4
If you owe £2 and then take away that debt, your balance is zero. We
can write this as
(-2) - (-2) = 0
You can pay off a debt on your balance only if someone gives you
£2. So subtracting a negative number is equivalent to adding a
positive number, i.e. —( — 2) is equivalent to +2.
— (—2) means +2
EXERCISE 17d Find;
2+(-l)
2 + (-l) = 2-1
= 1
-3-(-4)
3-(-4) = -3 + 4
= 1
1. 3 + (-l) 6. -2-(-5) 11^ -7 + (-7)
2. 5 + (-8) 7. 4 + (-7) 1^ -3-(-3)
3. 4-(-3) 8. -3-(-9) 1^. +4 + (-4)
4. -l-(-4) 9. -4 + (-10) 14. +2-(-4)
5. -2 + (-7) 10. 2-(-8) 1^ -3 + (-3)
2 + (-l)-(-4)
2 + ( -l)-(-4) = 2-1+4
= 5
16. 5 + (-l)-(-3) 21^ 9 + (-5)-(-9)
17. (-l) + (-l) + (--1) 22. 8-(-7) + (-2)
18. 4-(-2) + (-4) 23. 10+(-9) + (-7)
19. -2-(-2) + (- 4) 24. 12 + (-8)-(-4)
20. 6-(-7) + (-8) 25. 9 + (-12)-(-4)

ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF DIRECTED NUMBERS _
We can now use the following rules:
+ ( + a) = +a and -( + a) = —a
+ (-«) = -a and ~(-a) = +a
EXERCISE 17e Find:
1. 3 + (-2) 9; 10-(-5)
2. -3-( + 2) m -2-(-4)
3. 6-(-3) 12 + (-7)
11-
4. 4 + ( + 4) -4-(+8)
21-
5. -5 + (-7) H; 3-(-2)
6. 9-( + 2) 1£. -5 + (-4)
7. 7 + (-3) 8 + (-7)
21-
8. 8 + ( + 2) 4-(-5)
21-
17. 7 + (-3)-(+5) 24; 8 + ( + 9)-(-2)
18. 2-(-4) + (-6) 25; 7 + (-9)-( + 2)
19. 5 + (-2)-(+l) 26; 4+(-l)-( + 7)
20. 8-(-3) + ( + 5) 27; -3 + (+5)-(-2)
21. 7 + (-4)-(-2) 28; -4 + ( + 8) + (-7)
22. 3-( + 2) + (-5) 29; -9-( + 4)-(-10)
23. -9 + (-2)-(-3) -2-(+8) + (-9)

OO
1
1
OO
-8- -(—3) (brackets

II
1
= -8 + 3
= -5
31. 3-(4-3) M. -3-(7-10)
32. 5 + (7-9) 35; 6 + (8-15)
33. 4 + (8-12) 36. (3-5) + 2

Q
37. (3-8)-(9-4)
1
1
£1-
38. (4-9)-2 42. (3-l) + (5-10)
T
39. (7 + 4)-15 43;
1
cx
c/1
40. 8 + (3-8) 44.
1
45. Add ( + 7) to (-5).
46. Subtract 7 from —5.
47. Subtract ( — 2) from 1.
48. Find the value of “8 take away —10”.
49. Add —5 to +3.
50. Find the sum of —3 and +4.
51. Find the sum of —8 and +10.
52. Subtract positive 8 from negative 7.
53. Find the sum of —3 and —3 and —3.
54. Find the value of twice negative 3.
55. Find the value of four times —2.
MULTIPLICATION OF DIRECTED NUMBERS
Consider 3x2.
This means 2 + 2 + 2 = 6
So 4 X ( — 3) means ( — 3) + ( — 3) + (—3) + (—3) = —12
Order does not matter when we multiply (think of 2x5 = 5x2).
Therefore we can say
(-3) X 4 = 4 x (-3) = -12

EXERCISE 17f
Find the following products:
a)5x(-3) b)(-3)x5 c)( + 5)x(-3) d)(-3)x(+5)
a)5x(-3)=-15 b)(-3)x5=-15
c) ( + 5)x(-3) = -15 d) (-3)x(+5) = -15

Find the following products:
1. 6x(-4) 6. ( + 4)x(-3) 11. 8x(-2)
2. 7x(-2) 7. (-6)x( + 8) 12. (-9)x4

3. (-8)x3 8. (+l)x(-5) 13. ( + 6)x(-7)
4. (-6)x2 9. 6x(-l) 14. (-5) X 1
5. 9x(-3) 10. (-l)x(+5) 15. 5x(-2.5)
DIVISION OF NEGATIVE NUMBERS BY POSITIVE NUMBERS
Since 2x3 = 6, 6 = 3 = 2.
In the same way, (-3)x4 = —12, so (-12) = 4 = -3.
Notice that order does matter in division, e.g.
(-12) = 4 = -3
but we shall see that 4=(- 12) = ^
EXERCISE 17g
Find a)(-9) = 3 b)(-14)=( + 2) c)
a) (-9)=3 = -3
b) (-14) = ( + 2) = -7
Find:
1. (-6) = 2 5. (-12) = ( + 3) 9. (-20) = 4
2. (-10) = 5 6. (-18) = ( + 9) 10. (-28)=( + 7)

3. (-15) = 3 7. (-30) = ( + 3) 11. (-3)=3
4. (-24) = 6 8. (-36)= 12 12. (-10)=( + 5)
-16 -36
13. ~ 15. 17.
4 4 9
-27 -30
14. 16. 18.
6 3 15
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 17h 1. Which is the higher temperature, —5° or — 8°?
2. Write < or > between a) —3 2 b) — 2 —4.
Find:
3. -4+6 7. -2+(-3)-(-5)
4. 3+2-10 8. 4-(2-3)
5. 2 + (-4) 9. 6x(-4)
6. 3-(-l) 10. -36^3
1. Which is the lower temperature, 0° or — 3°?
2. Write < or > between a) 3 -4 b) -7 - 10.
Find:
3. 2-8 7. 3 + (5-8)
^\
4. 3-9 + 4 8. -2-(4-9)
5. ( + 2)-(-3) 9. (-3)x4
6. (-4)-(-5) 10. (-12)^6

INTRODUCING ALGEBRA
THE IDEA OF EQUATIONS
“I think of a number, and take away 3; the result is 7.”
We can see the number must be 10.
Using a letter to stand for the unknown number we can write the first
sentence as an equation:
X - 3 = 7
Then if x = 10 10 — 3 = 7
so X = 10 fits the equation.
EXERCISE 18a Form equations to illustrate the following statements and find the
unknown numbers;
I think of a number, add 4 and the result is 10.
The equation is x + 4 = 10.

The number is 6
1. I think of a number, subtract 3 and get 4.
2. I think of a number, add 1 and the result is 3.
3. If a number is added to 3 we get 9.
4. If 5 is subtracted from a number we get 2.
I think of a number, multiply it by 3 and the result is 12.
The equation is 3x = 12 (3x means 3 x x).

The number is 4.
5. I think of a number, double it and get 8.
6. If a number is multiplied by 7 the result is 14.
7. When we multiply a number by 3 we get 15.
8. 6 times an unknown number gives 24.
264
Introducing Algebra 265
Write sentences to show the meaning of the following equations:
Ax = 20
Ax — 20 means 4 times an unknown number gives 20,

or, I think of a number, multiply it by 4 and the result is 20.
9. 3x = 18 13. 5 -(-.x — 7
10. X+6 = 7 14. x-4 = 1
N)
SO
11.
oo
II 15.
1
II
12.
(N
o
16. x+1 = 4
II
SOLVING EQUATIONS
Some equations need an organised approach, not guesswork.

Imagine a balance:
on this side
there is a bag on this side,
containing an there are 9
unknown separate
number of marbles,
marbles, say x balancing the
marbles, and 4 marbles on the
loose marbles other side
Take 4 loose marbles from each side, so that the two sides still
balance.
X = 5
We write: x + 4 = 9
Take 4 from both sides x = 5
When we have found the value of x we have solved the equation.

As a second example suppose that:
on this side there is a

bag that originally held
X marbles but now has
2 missing
x-2 = 5
We can make the bag complete by putting back 2 marbles but, to

keep the balance, we must add 2 marbles to the right-hand side also.
So we write x — 2 = 5
Add 2 to both sides x = 1
Whatever you do to one side of an equation you must also

do to the other side.
EXERCISE 18b Solve the following equations:
y+4 = 6
y+4 = 6
Take 4 from both sides y = 2
1. x + 1 = 15 5. n -l“ 3 — 7 9; ct+ \ — 6
2. x + 9 = 18 6. x+4 = 9 10; a+8 = 15
3. 10+y = 12 7. a + 5 = 11 IL 7 + c = 10
4. 2+c = 9 8. 9 + a = 15 12. c+2 = 3
Some equations may have negative answers.
x-t-8 = 6
x-l-8 = 6
Take 8 from both sides X =
13. x-1-4 = 2 15. 3-ha = 2 17. A + w=2
14. x+6 = 1 16. j-h3 = 2 18. c+6 = 2

x—b = 2
X— 6 = 2
Add 6 to both sides X = 8
19. x—b = 4 23. c-8 = 1 27. fl-4 = 8
20. a-2 = 1 24. x-5 = 7 28; x-3 = 0
21. j-3 = 5 25. s-4 = 1 29; c-1 = 1
22. x—A — 6 26. x-9 = 3 30; y-l = 2
Sometimes the letter term is on the right-hand side instead of the left.
Solve the following equations
3 = x-4
3 = x-4
Add 4 to both sides 7 = X (7 = X is the same as x = 7)

X = 7
1. 4 = x-l-2 3. 7 = a+4 5; 1 = c-2
2. 6 = x-3 4. 6 = X —7 5 = ^+2
7. x-t-3 = 10 11. b + c = 10 IL x-t-6 = 5
8. 9-l-x = 4 12. d+4 = 1 ll- x-b3 = 15
9. c-l-4 = 4 13. 7 = x-1-3 IL y-b = 4
10. 3 = b+2 14. x+1 = 9 11; x-1 = 4
19. 6 = X —4 23. 10 = n-l 27; x-3 = 6
20. x-4 = 2 24. c-7 = 9 28; c-1 = 10
21. x-9 = 2 25. x-4 = 8 29; 4 = b-\
22. x-1 = 4 26. y-l =9 30; x-4 = 12
31. y-9 = 14 33. X -j-1 = 8 35; x+8 = 1
32. 2 = z-2 34. x-1 = 8 36. x-8 = 1

37. c+5 = 9 39. 1 = c-3 £L 34-z = 1
38. d-3 = 1 40. 1 = c+3 42. z+ 3 = 5
MULTIPLES OF x
Imagine that on
this side of the
scales there are
3 bags each On this side
containing an there are 12
equal unknown loose marbles
number of
marbles, say x
in each
3a; = 12
We can keep the balance if we divide the contents of each scale pan
by 3.
EXERCISE 18d Solve the following equations:
6x = 12
6x = 12
Divide both sides by 6 x = 2
3x = 7
Lk)
It
Divide both sides by 3 X = ^

3 i
^ i
1. Sx = 10 5. 9. Sp = 7
II
2. 6.
o^
3x = 9 10. 2x = 40
11
3. 2x = 5 7. 3a = 1
IL ly = 14
4. lx = 21 8. 6z = 18 12. 6a = 3
13. 6.V = 36 17. 5z = 9

1
II
£ -
14. 6x = 6 18. 2y = 1 22;
II
15. 6x = 1 19. 3x = 27 23; 2z = 10
16.
oo
5z = 10 20. 24. 7x = 1
li
MIXED OPERATIONS
EXERCISE 18e Solve the following equations:
1. 5.
SO
x+4 = 8 9; 2x = 11
II
2. x-4 = 8 6. 4x = 12 x-2 = 11
3. 4x = 8 7. 4 + x = 12
IL 12 = x + 4
4. 5+y = 6 8. x-4 = 12 X— 12 = 4
11;
13. 8 = c+2 17. ly = 2 21; 3 = a —4
14. 3x = 10 18. 3+x = 2 x+3 = 5

££:
15. 20 = 4x 19. 3x = 8
£1-
II
16. 5+x = 4 20. x+6 = 1 24. z —5 = 6
25. c+ 5 = 5 21. a+5 = 25 29. a-25 = 5
26. 5a = 25 28. a-5 = 25 30. 25a = 5

TWO OPERATIONS
EXERCISE 18f The aim is to get the letter term on its own.
Solve the following equations:
7 = 3x-5
7 = 3x-5
Add 5 to both sides 12 = 3x
Divide both sides by 3 4 = x
i.e. X = 4
2x + 3 = 5
2x + 3 = 5
Take 3 from both sides 2x = 2
Divide both sides by 2 x = \
(It is possible to check whether your answer is correct. We

can put x = I in the left-hand side of the equation and
see if we get the same value on the right-hand side.)
Check: If .v = 1, left-hand side = 2 x 1 -|- 3 = 5
Right-hand side = 5, so x = 1 fits the equation.

so
CN
1. 6x3-2 = 26 8. 1 20 = 12x-4
II
®-
2. 4x-b7 = 19 9. 5z-f 9 = 4 16; 9x-bl = 28

k>J
3. 17 = 7x-b3 10. 17. 9 = 8x-15

II
1
OS
4. 11. 3x-b4 = 25 1£. 8 = 8-f3z

11
!
5. 7x-f 1 = 22 12. 2x4-15 = 25 11 -

6x + 7 = 1
6. 3U4-12 = 12 13. 13 == 3x4-4 20.

II
1
7. 10 = lOx-50 14. 5z-9 = 16 21; 15 = \+lx

SO
22. 27. 3a4-4 = 1 32;

X
lOx-6 = 24
!l
1
23. 3x-2 = 3 28. 2x4-6 = 6 33;

II
[
24. 4-p5x = -5 29. 19X-16 = 22 34. 10-f2x = -2
25. 7 = 2z-h6 30. 3x4-1 = 11 35; 8 = 3x4-7
26. 5 = 7x-23 31. 16 = 7x-l 36. 9 = 6u-27

37. 6x+l = -5 39. 2a: + 4 = 14 41. 7 = l-2jc
38. 4z + 3 = 4 40. 3 = 7x-3 42. 8x+ll=3
PROBLEMS
EXERCISE 18g Form equations and solve the problems:
I think of a number, double it and add 3. The result is 15.

What is the number?
Let the number be x 2x+3 = 15
Divide both sides by 2 X = 6
The number is 6.
The side of a square is xcm. Its perimeter is 20 cm.

Find X.
X cm
X cm X cm
X cm
The perimeter is x + x + x + xcm, which is 4xcm
4x = 20
1. I think of a number, multiply it by 4 and subtract 8. The result

™ is 20. What is the number?
2. I think of a number, multiply it by 6 and subtract 12. The result

is 30. What is the number?
I think of a number, multiply it by 3 and add 6. The result is

21. What is the number?
4. When 8 is added to an unknown number the result is 10. What

is the number?
I think of a number, multiply it by 3 and add the result to 7.

The total is 28. What is the number?
The sides of a rectangle are xcm and 3 cm. Its perimeter is

~ 24 cm. Find x.
X cm
3 cm 3 cm
X cm
7. The lengths of the three sides of a triangle are xcm, xcm and
6 cm. Its perimeter is 20 cm. Find x.
8. Mary and Jean each have x sweets and Susan has 10 sweets.
Amongst them they have 24 sweets. What is x?
9. Three boys had x sweets each. Amongst them they gave 9 sweets
to a fourth boy and then found that they had 18 sweets left
altogether. Find x.
10. I have two pieces of ribbon each x cm long and a third piece
9 cm long. Altogether there are 31cm of ribbon. What is the
length of each of the first two pieces?
EQUATIONS WITH LETTER TERMS ON BOTH SIDES
Some equations have letter terms on both sides. Consider the equation
5x + 1 = 2x + 9
We want to have a letter term on one side only so we need to take 2x

from both sides. This gives
3x + 1 = 9
and we can go on to solve the equation as before.
Notice that we want the letter term on the side which has the greater
number of x’s to start with.
If we look at the equation
9 — 4x = 2x + 4
we can see that there is a lack of x’s on the left-hand side, so there
are more x’s on the right-hand side. Add 4x to both sides and then
the equation becomes
9 = 6x -I- 4
and we can go on as before.

EXERCISE 18h Deal with the letters first, then the numbers.
Solve the following equations:
5v -f 2 — 'lx 9
5x4-2 = 2x3-9
Take lx from both sides 3x-f2 = 9
t^|r<)
(N
Divide both sides by 3
II
II
1. 3v+4 = lx -f 8 £. 7x-f3 = 3x + 31
2. x+7 = 4x + 4 624-4 = 2r-|-1
3. lx+ 5 = 5x —4 7. 7x —25 = 3x — 1
4. 3x— 1 = 5x— 11 ^ llx —6 = 8x4-9
9+x = 4—4x
94-x = 4 —4x
Add 4x to both sides 94-5x = 4
Take 9 from both sides 5x = —5
Divide both sides by 5 X = -1
Check: If x = — 1, left-hand side = 9-|-( —1)
= 8
right-hand side = 4—(—4)
= 8
So X = —1 is the solution.
9. 4x-3 = 39-2x 13. 5x—6 = 3 —4x
10. 5-fx = 17 —5x 14. 124-2x = 24-4x
11. 7 —2x = 4+x 15. 32—6x = 8-|-2x
12. 14—lx = 5x-l-3 16. 9 —3x = —5-|-4x

9-3x = l5-4x
9-3x = 15-4x
(notice that there is a greater lack of x’s on the right)
Add 4x to both sides 9 + x = 15
Take 9 from both sides X = 6
17. 5- 3x = 1 —X 21^ 16 —6x = 1 —X
18. 16--2x --= l9-5x 4-3x == l-4x
19. 6- X = \2-2x 4-2x == 8-5x
20. -2:-4x = 6 —2x 2^ 3 —X = 5 —3x
25. 6- 3x = 4x-l 13-4x = 4x-3
26. 4z+l = 6z-3 30. 7x-f 6 == X —6

27. 3- 6x = 6x —3 6 —2x == 9-5x
28. 8- 4x = 14-7x 32. 3-2x == 3 +x
3-2x = 5
3-2x = 5
(the left-hand side has a lack of x’s)
Add 2x to both sides 3 = 54-2x
Take 5 from both sides -2 = 2x
Divide both sides by 2 X = -1
33. 13-4x = 5 6 = 8-3x
34. 6 = 2 —2x 0 = 6-2x
37. 9x4-4 = 3x4-1 42. 5-3x = 2
38. 2x4-3 = 12x 43. 64-3x = 7 —X
39. 7 —2x = 3 —6x 44. 5-2x = 4x-7
40. 3x —6 = 6—X 45. 5x4-3 = —7 —X

o
iji
rj
41. 46. 4-3x = 0

II
1
1
Introducing Algebra Tib
SIMPLIFYING EXPRESSIONS
Like Terms
Consider 3x+5x —4x + 2j!:.

This is called an expression and can be simplified to 6x.
3x, 5x, 4x and 2x are all terms in this expression. Each term
contains x. They are of the same type and are called like terms.
EXERCISE 18i Simplify:
4h-6h + lh-h
4h-6h + 7h-h = 4h
1. 3x + x + 4x + 2x
1 -
9y-3y + 2_v
2. 3x—x + 4x —2x 7. 2-3+9-1
7
SO
3. — 6x + 8x
1
1
1
-
4. 6-1+4-7 £. -3+5-1
5. — 8x + 6x 10. — 2x —x+3x
Unlike Terms
3x + 2x —7 can be simplified to 5x —7, and 5x —2y + 4x—3j can be

simplified to 9x —5y.
Terms containing x are different from terms without an x. They are

called unlike terms and cannot be collected. Similarly 9x and 5y are
unlike terms; therefore 9x —5y cannot be simplified.
EXERCISE 18j Simplify:
3x + 4 — 7 — 2x + 4x
3x + 4 —7 —2x + 4x = 5x—3
2x + 4y —X —5_v
2x + 4y —.X—5y = x—y
1. 2.V + 4 + 3 + 5x 4. 4a + 5c —6a
2. 2x — 4 + 3x + 9 5. 6x —5y + 2x + 3y
3. 5x—2 —3—X 6. 6x + 5y + 2x + 3y
7. 6x-\-5y + 2x — 2>y 11; 9x + 3j-10x
8. 6x + 5y — 2x + 3y 11; 2x — — 8x
9. Ax -j-1 -l“ 3x A~2-\~ x 1£. 7—X —6—3x
10. 6x — 9 + 2x+\ 11; 8 — 1 — 7x + 2x
11. 7x-3-9-4x 11; 9x-l+4-llx
17. 6x — 5y + 2x + 3_v + 2x 11; — 2z+3x —4j + 6z+x—3j
11; 6x — 5 j — 2x — 3_y + 7x—y 11- 4x + 3j —4+6x —2>’—7—X
19. 30x+2 — 15x—6 + 4 22. 7x + 3 —9 —9x + 2x—6+11
EQUATIONS CONTAINING LIKE TERMS
If there are a lot of terms in an equation, first collect the like terms
on each side separately.
EXERCISE 18k Solve the following equations;
2x + 3 —x + 5 = 3x + 4x--6
2x + 3-■x + 5 = 3x + 4x —6
x+8 = 7x -6
Take x from both sides 8 = 6x -6
Add 6 to both sides 14 = 6x
Divide both sides by 6 - X

6 ^
X = ^ — 2—
^ 3
1. 3x+2 + 2x = 7 3x + 2x —4x = 6
2. 7 + 3X-6 = 4 7. 7 = 2-3 + 4X
3. 6 = 5x + 2 —4x 1; 5x+x —6x + 2x = 9
4. 9 + 4 = 3x + 4x 1; 5+x —4x + x = 1
5. 3x+8 —5x = 2 12; 6x = x+2 —7— 1
11. 5x+6+3x = 10 11; 1 — 4 — 3 + 2x = 3x
12. 8 = 7-11+6X 11; 3x—4x—X = X —6
13. 7 + 2x = 12x —7x + 2 16. 2 —4x —X = x + 8

17. —2x + x = 3x— 12 19;
CN
11
1
1
1
18. —4 + x —2 —X = X 20. 4 —X —2+x = X
21. 3x + 1 + 2x = 6 2x + 7 —4x+ 1 = 4
22. 4x —2+6x —4 = 64 6 —3x —5x— 1 =
?Zz 10
23. 2x + 7 — X + 3 = 6x 28; 6x + 3 + 6 = X —4-2
24. 6 —2x —4 + 5x = 17 X-3 + 7X + 9 = 10
25. 9x—6 —X —2 = 0 30. 15x + 2x—6x —9x = 20
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 181 1". Solve the equation 3x + 2 = 4.
2- '^ think of a number, add 4 and the result is 10. Form an

equation and solve it to find the number I thought of.
3. Solve the equation 6x + 2 = 3x + 8.
4. Solve the equation 4x — 2 = —6.
Simplify 4x-3y + 5x + 2y.
6. Solve the equation 4x + 2 — x=6.
EXERCISE 18m 1. Solve the equation 4.v —5 = 3.
^ 2. ^Simplify 3c —5c + 9c.
3. Solve the equation 3x — 2 = 4 — x.
. A. When I think of a number, double it and add three, I get 11.

What number did I think of?
5. Solve the equation x + 2x — 4 = 9.
Simplify 2a+ 4-3 +5a-a.
EXERCISE 18n 1."Îf 2jc-9 = 2, find x.
2. Simplify 6p+/7 —3p —4p.
3. Find x if 4 — x = 6 —2x.
3c+ 2 = c + 2, find c.
5. Peter had 14 marbles and lost x of them. John started with

8 marbles and gained x. The two boys then found that they each
had the same number of marbles. Form an equation and find x.
6. Simplify 3fi4-4c —5c + c.
EXERCISE 18p 1. Find X if 9 = 3x-3.
^27^ Simplify 2x + 5x — 8x.
Solve the equation 3 — 2n = 5 + 3n.
4. If 6x —4 = 2x + 4 find x.
5. Simplify 'ia + 2d—a + Ac~l>d-\-c.
Solve the equation 2x + 8 —3x —6 = 4.

VOLUME
In the science laboratory you may well have seen a container with a
spout similar to the one shown in the diagram.
The container is filled with water to the level of the spout. Any solid
which is put into the water will force a quantity of water into the
measuring jug. The volume of this water will be equal to the volume
of the solid. The volume of a solid is the amount of space it occupies.
CUBIC UNITS
As with area, we need a convenient unit for measuring volume. The

most suitable unit is a cube.
A B
How many of the smallest cubes are needed to fill the same space as
each of the solids A and B? Careful counting will show that 8 small
cubes fill the same space as solid A and 12 small cubes fill the same
space as solid B.
A cube with a side of 1 cm has a volume of one cubic centimetre

which is written 1 cm^.
Similarly a cube with a side of 1 mm has a volume of 1 mm^ and a

cube with a side of 1 m has a volume of 1 m^.
279
VOLUME OF A CUBOID
The diagram shows a rectangular block or cuboid measuring 4 cm by

3 cm by 2 cm. To cover the area on which the block stands we need
three rows of cubes measuring 1 cm by 1 cm by 1 cm, with four cubes
in each row, i.e. 12 cubes. A second layer of 12 cubes is needed to
give the volume shown, so the volume of the block is 24 cubes.
But the volume of one cube is 1 cm^.

Therefore the volume of the solid is 24 cm^.
This is also given when we calculate length x breadth x height,
i e. the volume of the block = 4x3 x 2cm^
or the volume of the block = length x breadth x height
EXERCISE 19a
Find the volume of a cuboid measuring 12 cm by 10 cm by
5 cm.
Volume of cuboid = length x breadth x height
= 12 X 10 X 5cm^
i.e. Volume = 600 cm^
Find the volume of each of the following cuboids
Length Breadth Height
1. 4 cm 4 cm 3 cm
2. 20 mm 10 mm 8 mm
3. 45 mm 20 mm 6 mm
4. 5 mm 4 mm 0.8 mm
5. 6.1 m 4m 1.3 m
6. 3.5 cm 2.5 cm 1.2 cm

Volume 281
7. 4m 3m 2m
8. 8m 5m 4m
9. 8 cm 3 cm jcm
12 cm 1.2 cm 0.5 cm
IL 4.5 m 1.2m 0.8 m
12. 1.2m 0.9 m 0.7 m
Find the volume of a cube with the given side:
6 cm
Volume of cube = length x breadth x height
= 6x6x6 cm^
i.e. Volume = 216cm^
13. 4 cm 16. jcm 1£. 8 km

14. 5 cm 17. 2.5 cm Ijkm
20:
15. 2m 18. 3 km 21. 3.4m
EXERCISE 19b
1. Draw a cube of side 4 cm. How many cubes of side 2 cm

would be needed to fill the same space?
2. Draw a cuboid measuring 6 cm by 4 cm by 2 cm. How many

cubes of side 2 cm would be needed to fill the same space?
3. Draw a cube of side 6 cm. How many cubes of side 3 cm

would be needed to fill the same space?
4. Draw a cuboid measuring 8 cm by 6 cm by 2 cm. How many

cubes of side 2 cm would be needed to fill the same space?
5. How many cubes of side 5 cm would be needed to fill the space

inside a hollow cube of side 20 cm?
6 . A cuboid measures 4 cm by 8 cm by 4 cm. The same space is to be

filled by smaller cubes. How many cubes are needed if their side is
a) 1cm b) 2 cm c) 4 cm?
CHANGING UNITS OF VOLUME
Consider a cube of side 1cm. If each edge is divided into 10 mm the

cube can be divided into 10 layers, each layer with lOx 10 cubes of
side 1 mm,
i.e. 1 cm^ = 10 X 10 X 10 mm^
Similarly, since 1 m = 100 cm
1 cubic metre = 100 x 100 x 100 cm^
i.e. Im^ = 1000 000 cm^

Volume 283
EXERCISE 19c
Express 2.4 m^ in a) cm^ b) mm^.
a) Since Im^ = 100 X 100X lOOcm^
= 2.4X lOOx lOOx lOOcm^
= 2400000cm^
b) Since Im^ = 1000X 1000 X lOOOmm^
2.4 m^ = 2.4 X 1000 X 1000 X 1000 mm^
= 2 400 000 000 mm^
Express in mm^:
1. 8cm^ 3. 6.2 cm^ 0.092 m'
2. 14cm^ 4. 0.43 cm^ 0.04 cm‘
Express in cm^:
7. Sm^ 9; 0.42 m^ IT 22 mm^
8. 2.5 m^ 10. 0.0063 m^ 12. 731 mm'
CAPACITY
When we buy a bottle of milk or a can of engine oil we are not

usually interested in the external measurements or volume of the
container. What really concerns us is the capacity of the container, i.e.
how much milk is inside the bottle, or how much engine oil is inside
the can.
The most common unit of capacity in the metric system is the litre.
(A litre is roughly equivalent to two bottles of milk.) A litre is much
larger than a cubic centimetre but much smaller than a cubic metre.
The relationship between these quantities is:
1000 cm^ = 1 litre
i.e. a litre is the volume of a cube of side 10 cm
and 1000 litres = 1 m^
When the amount of liquid is small, such as dosages for medicines,

the millilitre (ml) is used. A millilitre is a thousandth part of a litre,
i.e.
1000 ml = 1 litre or 1 ml = 1 cm^
EXERCISE 19d
Express 5.6 litres in cm^.
1 litre = lOOOcm^
5.6 litres = 5.6 x 1000 cm^
= 5600 cm^
Express in cm^:
1. 2.5 litres 3. 0.54 litres 5. 35 litres
2. 1.76 litres 4. 0.0075 litres 6. 0.028 litres
Express in litres:
7. 7000 cm^ 8. 4000 cm^ 9. 24 000 cm^
Express in litres;
10. 5m3 11. 12m3 12. 4.6 cm^
MIXED UNITS
Before we can find the volume of a cuboid, all measurements must be

expressed in the same unit.
EXERCISE 19e
Find the volume of a cuboid measuring 2 m by 70 cm by
30 cm.
Give your answer in a) cm^ b) m^.
a) (All the measurements must be in centimetres so we first

convert the 2 m into centimetres.)
Length of cuboid = 2m = 2xl00cm = 200 cm
Volume of cuboid = length x breadth x height
= 200 X 70 X 30 cm^
= 420 000 cm^
b) (We convert all the measurements to metres before

finding the volume.)
70
Breadth of cuboid = 70 cm = = 0.7 m
30
Height of cuboid = 30 cm = j^rn = 0.3 m
.'. Volume of cuboid = 2x0.7x0.3m^
= 0.42 m^
Volume 285
Find the volumes of the following cuboids, giving your answers in the
units stated in brackets:
1. 50 mm 30 mm 20 mm (cm^)
2. 400 cm 100 cm 50 cm K)
3. 1m 4 cm 2 cm (cm^)
4. 15 cm 80 mm 50 mm (cm^)
5. 6 cm 12 mm 8 mm (mm^)
6. 2m 50 cm 40 mm (cm^)
7. 4 cm 35 mm 2 cm (cm^)
20 m 80 cm 50 cm (m^)
I-
9; 3.5 cm 25 mm 20 mm (cm^)
10. jm 45 mm 8 mm (cm^)
IL 0.5 cm 4 mm 2 mm (mm^)
12; 1 m 40 cm 30 cm (m^)
PROBLEMS INVOLVING CUBOIDS
EXERCISE 19f
Find the volume of a rectangular block of wood measuring
8 cm by 6 cm which is 2 m long. Give your answer in cubic
centimetres.
Working in centimetres:
Length of block = 2m = 2xl00cm = 200 cm
Volume of block = length x breadth x height
= 200 X 8 X 6cm^
= 9600cm^
A rectangular metal water tank is 3 m long, 2.5 m wide and

80 cm deep.
Find its capacity in a) m^ b) litres.
a) Working in metres:
80
Depth of tank = 80cm =-m = 0.8 m
^ 100
Capacity of tank = length x breadth x height
= 3 X 2.5 X 0.8 m^
= 6m^
b) 1 m^ = 1000 litres
Capacity of tank = 6x 1000litres
= 6000 litres
1. Find the volume of air in a room measuring 4 m by 5 m which is

3 m high.
2. Find the volume, in cm^, of a concrete block measuring 36cm

by 18cm by 12cm.
3. Find the volume of a school hall which is 30 m long and

24 m wide if the ceiling is 9 m high.
4. An electric light bulb is sold in a box measuring 10 cm by 6 cm

““ by 6 cm. If the shopkeeper receives them in a carton measuring
50 cm by 30 cm by 30 cm, how many bulbs would be packed in a
carton?
5. A classroom is 10 m long, 8 m wide and 3 m high. How many

pupils should it be used for if each pupil requires 5m^ of air
space?
6. How many cubic metres of water are required to fill a

rectangular swimming bath 15 m long and 10 m wide which is
2 m deep throughout? How many litres is this?
7. How many rectangular packets, measuring 8 cm by 6 cm by

4 cm, may be packed in a rectangular cardboard box measuring
30 cm by 24 cm by 16 cm?
8. A water storage tank is 3m long, 2m wide and Ijm deep. How

many litres of water will it hold?
Volume 287
9. How many lead cubes of side 2 cm could be made from a lead

cube of side 8 cm?
10- How many lead cubes of side 5 mm could be made from a

rectangular block of lead measuring 10 cm by 5 cm by 4 cm?
MIXED EXERCISES
EXERCISE 19g 1. Express 3.2m^ in a) cm^ b) mm^.
2. Express 1.6 litres in cm^.
3. Find the volume of a cube of side 4 cm.
4. Find the volume, in cm^, of a cuboid measuring 2 m by 25 cm by

10 cm.
5. Find the volume, in mm^, of a cuboid measuring 5 cm by 3 cm by

9 mm.
EXERCISE 19h 1. Express 8cm^ in a) mm^ b) m^.
2. Express 3500 cm^ in litres.
3. Find the volume of a cuboid measuring 10 cm by 5 cm by 6 cm.
4. Find, in cm^, the volume of a cube of side 8 mm.
5. Find the volume, in cm^, of a cuboid measuring 50 cm by 1.2 m

by 20 cm.
EXERCISE 19i 1_. Express 0.009 m^ in a) cm^ b) mm^
2. Express 0.44 litres in cm^.
Find the volume of a cube of side 6 cm.
4. Find the volume of a cuboid measuring 12 cm by 6 cm by 4 cm.
^ Find the capacity, in litres, of a rectangular tank measuring

2 m by 1.5 m by 80 cm.
EXERCISE 19j Express 900cm^ in m^.
^ Express 10 800cm^ in litres.
^ Express 0.075 m^ in litres.
4. Find, in cm^, the volume of a cube of side 20 mm.
5. Find, in m^, the volume of a cuboid measuring

150 cm by 100 cm by 80 cm.
DRAWING CUBES AND CUBOIDS
A cube is a three-dimensional object. Each of its faces is a square.

When we draw a cube on a flat sheet of paper only one of its faces
can be drawn as a square; the other faces that can be seen are drawn
as parallelograms. Using a square grid of lines or dots makes it easier
to get parallel edges.
Cuboids can be drawn in a similar way.
EXERCISE 19k 1. Use the diagrams above to answer the following questions.
a) Measure each of the lines on the drawing of the cube. Are

they all the same length?
b) Measure each of the lines on the drawing of the cuboid. Are

these the same as the measurements marked on the drawing?
2. Use squared paper to draw a cube of side 3 cm. Do you need to

put the measurements on the diagram? Give a reason for your
answer.
3. Use squared paper to draw a picture of a cuboid measuring 4 cm

by 2 cm by 1 cm. If you do not put the dimensions of the cuboid
on your drawing, can someone else tell what the measurements
of the cuboid are?
USING ISOMETRIC PAPER TO DRAW CUBES AND CUBOIDS
A cube can be drawn in another way, with a vertical edge right at the
front. Drawn in this way, each face is a parallelogram. This is not easy
to do freehand but there is a grid, called an isometric grid, that makes
the job simple. (Sometimes the grid is replaced by dots.)
Cuboids can be drawn in a similar way.
Volume 289
EXERCISE 191 Use isometric paper for this exercise.
1. Measure each of the lines on the drawing of the cube above. What
do you notice?
2. Measure each of the lines on the drawing of the cuboid above.

What do you notice?
This drawing represents a cube of side 2 cm.

a) Measure each line in this drawing. What do you notice?
b) Draw a picture of a cube of side 4 cm, then measure each of
the lines you have drawn.
c) Do you need to put measurements on your drawing?
d) What is the disadvantage of using isometric paper to draw a
cube?
4.
This drawing represents a cuboid measuring 5 cm by 3 cm

by 1 cm.
a) Measure each line on the drawing. What do you notice?
b) Draw a picture of a cuboid measuring 6 cm by 4 cm by 3 cm.

Measure each of your lines. What do you notice?
When cubes and cuboids are drawn on isometric paper,

the lengths of the lines representing the edges are the
correct length.
5. Draw a picture of each of the following solids.
a) A cube of side 5 cm.
b) A cube of side 8 cm.
c) A cuboid 6 cm by 4 cm by 1 cm.
d) A cuboid 3 cm by 5 cm by 3 cm.
MAKING CUBES AND CUBOIDS
Any solid with flat faces can be made from a flat sheet.
Volume 291
A cube can be made from six separate squares.
We can avoid a lot of unnecessary sticking if we join some squares

together before cutting out.
This is called a net.
There are other arrangements of six squares that can be folded up to

make a cube. Not all arrangements of six squares will work however,
as will be seen in the next exercise.
EXERCISE 19m 1. Below is the net of a cube of edge 4 cm.
Draw the net on 1 cm squared paper and cut it out. Fold it

along the broken lines. Fix it together with sticky tape.
2. Draw this net full-size on 1 cm squared paper.
7 cm
4 cm
7cm 4cm 4 cm
1
1 1 I
1 1 I
1
1 4 cm
7 cm
Cut the net out and fold along the dotted lines. Stick the edges
together.
a) (i) How many faces are rectangles measuring 7 cm by 4 cm?

(ii) How many faces are rectangles measuring 7 cm by 3 cm?
(iii) What are the measurements of the remaining faces?
b) Draw another arrangement of the rectangles which will fold
up to make this cuboid.
3. This cuboid is 4 cm long, 2 cm wide and 1 cm high.

a) How many faces does this cuboid
have?
b) Sketch the faces, showing their

measurements.
c) On 1 cm grid paper, draw a net

that will make this cuboid.
4. This net will make a cuboid.
a) Sketch the cuboid, and show its

4 cm
measurements.
b) Which edge joins HI?

N M
2 cm
c) Which corners join A?
L 2 cm K
Volume 293
This cube is cut along the edges drawn with a thick line and
flattened out.
Draw the flattened shape.
7. Here are two arrangements of six squares.
a) Copy these on 1 cm squared paper.
b) Draw as many other arrangements of six squares as you can

find.
c) Which of your arrangements, including the two given here,

will fold up to make a cube? If you cannot tell by looking,
cut them out and try to make a cube.
VECTORS
If you arranged to meet your friend 3 km from your home, this

information would not be enough to ensure that you both went to the
same place. You would also need to know which way to go.
Two pieces of information are required to describe where one place is

in relation to another: the distance and the direction. Quantities which
have both size (magnitude) and direction are called vectors.
A quantity which has magnitude but not direction is called a scalar.

For example, the amount of money in your pocket or the number of
pupils in your school are scalar quantities.
EXERCISE 20a State whether the following sentences refer to vector or scalar
quantities;
1. There are 24 pupils in my class.
2. To get to school I walk ^ km due north.
3. There are 11 players in a cricket team.
4. John walked at 6 km per hour.
5. The vertical cliff face is 50 m high.
6. Give other examples of

a) vector quantities b) scalar quantities.
REPRESENTING VECTORS
We can represent a vector by a straight line and indicate its direction

with an arrow. For example
We use a, b, c, . . . to name the vectors.
When writing by hand it is difficult to write a, which is in heavy type,

so we use a.
294
Vectors 295
In the diagram below, the movement along a corresponds to 4 across

and 2 up and we can write
The vector b can be described as 8 across and 4 down. As with

coordinates, which we looked at in Chapter 16, we use negative
numbers to indicate movement down or movement to the left.
Therefore b
Notice that the top number represents movement across and that the
bottom number represents movement up or down.
Vectors 297
On squared paper draw the following vectors. Label each vector with
its letter and an arrow:
3 -2
8. a 1^. f
5 5
-4’
9. b 1£. g
-3 lOj
2 -1
10. c 15. h
-4 -5
6
11. d 1£. i =
-12
-4'
12. e 17. j =
3
1^. What do you notice about the vectors in questions 8 and 14,
and in questions 10 and 11?
EXERCISE 20c In each of the following questions you are given a vector followed by
the coordinates of its starting point. Find the coordinates of its other
end:
5
2/’
The coordinates of its other end are (7, 3).
(O' (:0'
2- ( 0 - 5- ( 0- (3 . - 1 )
3. ( 2} ®- (J) (4,2)
7. (2, -4) 10; (G) (2, -I)
8.
(::)■ (-3, -2) 21- (1) (-4, -3)
9.
G) < -2, -3) 12. (G) (-3, -I)
In each of the following questions a vector is given followed by the

coordinates of its other end. Find the coordinates of its starting point:
The coordinates of the vector’s starting point are (2, 2).
/10\
13.
(}
2 111 (G) (-5, 2)
14.
(G) 19;
(G) (-3, 2)
15.
(G) 20;
(1) (-3,
16.
G) 2r.
G) < -5, -2)
17.
(G) '> 22;
(G)' (I, 7)
Vectors 299
CAPITAL LETTER NOTATION
In the diagram A and B are two points.
We can denote the vector from A to B as A? where A^ =
Similarly BC =
Write down the vector AlS where:

1. A is (1, 4), B is (7, 6) 6. A is (3, 0), B is (5, -2)
2. A is (-3, 4), B is (2, 3) 7. A is (6, 3), B is (4, 1)
3. A is (7, 3), B is (1, 2) 8. A is ( — 1, —3), B is (—5,
4. A is (-1, 4), B is (5, 9) 9. A is (2, 6), B is (2, -6)
5. A is (2, 1), B is (-3, -5) 10. A is (2, -3), B is (4, 5)
EQUAL VECTORS, PARALLEL VECTORS AND NEGATIVE VECTORS
In the diagram, we can see that
'5^
a = and b =
so we say that a = b
The lines representing a and b are parallel and equal in length.
Now c = and
so c = 2a
This time a and c are parallel but c is twice the size of a.
If we look at a and d we have
d =
Although d and a are parallel and the same size, they are in opposite
directions,
so we say that d = —a
Vectors 301
-5
Now
2
and we can see from the diagram that although e is the same size as
a, b and d, it is not parallel to them or to c. So e is not equal to any
of the other vectors.
EXERCISE 20e 1. Write the vectors a, b, c, d and e in the form
What is the relationship between

a) a and b b) a and c c) a and d
d) a and e e) b and e f) d and c?
Find as many relationships as you can between the vectors in the

diagram.
3. If a = I draw diagrams to represent a, 2a, —a, ja.
Now write the vectors 2a, —a, ja in the form

V?.
4. If b draw diagrams to represent b, —b, 2b, —2b.
Now write the vectors —b, 2b, —2b in the form
5. If c = I \ draw diagrams to represent c, 2c, —c, 3c.
Now write the vectors 2c, —c, 3c in the form
I -3 ,
6. If d = 1 ^1 draw diagrams to represent d, —d, 2d, —2d.
Now write the vectors —d, 2d, —2d in the form
2^ If e = ^ write, in the form . the vectors 2e, —e, 3e
and —4e.
^ If f = ^ write, in the form , the vectors 3f, —2f, 5f
and —4f.
9. If g = ^ write, in the form , the vectors —g, 3g,
ig, and -2g.
10. If b = ^ write, in the form , the vectors 3h, —4h,
yh, and — 5h.

Vectors 303
ADDITION OF VECTORS
The displacement from A to B followed by the displacement from B

to C is equivalent to the displacement from A to C, so we write
AB + ^ = a2
To add two vectors we add the corresponding numbers in the ordered

pairs that represent them.
EXERCISE 20f
find a+b and illustrate
on a diagram.
In questions 1 to 10 find a + b and illustrate on a diagram;
1. a 6. a
.0/’ 3y
-4^
2. a =
3. a . h\ u ''- 2'
i- «-U . K
4. a
i)-fi »•■(;). -R
5. a , b 10, a = 0), b = (j;
In questions 11 to 20 find the following vectors:
i.e. a + b = b 4- a
Vectors 305
i.e. the order in which you do the addition does not matter.
ADDITION OF MORE THAN TWO VECTORS
-2
If a b = and c = we can find a+b+c by adding
4
the corresponding numbers in the ordered pairs.
a + b + c =
Again the order of addition does not matter, as you can see from the
diagrams below:
i.e. a + b + c = a + c + b
There are other possible orders in which we could add a, b and c.

EXERCISE 20g 1. If a = and c = I I find:

3/’
a) a + b b) b + a c) b + c d) c + b
e) 2a f) 3a g) a+b+c h) c + b + a
2. If a = and c = 1 1 find:
-2 r —3;
a) a + b b) b + a c) a + c d) c + a
e) 3b f) 4c
3. If a = and
V “ f 2 ' = '.61
a) a + b + c b) 2a + b + 3c c) a + 2b + 3c
4. If a-, b = ( . 1 and c = find:
a) 2a + 2b + 3c b) a + 5b + 2c
SUBTRACTION OF VECTORS
/4\ / 2
If a = ( . 1 and b = . ^
we know that a —b = a + ( —b)
But this result is also given by
.. 3
2
a —b
.3, -5
Therefore to subtract vectors we subtract the corresponding numbers

in the ordered pairs.
Note that = = ^
and this is not the same as a —b.

So in subtraction, the order does matter.
Vectors 307
EXERCISE 20h In questions 1 to 4, find a —b and draw diagrams to represent a, b

and a — b ;
Find the following vectors:

19. If a = I find:
a) a —b
20. If a = I and c =
a) a —b b) b —c
21. c =
a) 2a —b b) 3b —c c) 2a-5b
d)a + b —c e)b —c —a
22.
a) 2a+b —c b) a—b + c c) 2a + b+c

d) -3b + 4c e) 2b-4c
23.
a) a + 2b —c b) 3a-4b c) 4b—3c
MORE ALGEBRA
BRACKETS
Sometimes brackets are used to hold two quantities together. For

instance, if we wish to multiply both x and 3 by 4 we write 4(x+3).
The multiplication sign is invisible just as it is in 5x, which means
5 XX.
4(x + 3) means “four times everything in the brackets”

so we have 4xx and 4x3, and we write 4(x + 3) = 4x+12.
EXERCISE 21a Multiply out the following brackets:
3(4x + 2)
3(4x + 2) = l2x + 6
2(x-l)
2(x-l) = 2x-2
1. 2(x+l) 5. 2(4+ 5x) 9; 3(6-4x)
2. 3(3x-2) 6. 2(6 + 5fl) 5(x— 1)
3. 5(x+6) 7. 5(a + b) 11: 7(2-X)
4. 4(3x-3) 8. 4(4x-3) 12. 8(3-2x)
To simplify an expression containing brackets we first multiply out the

brackets and then collect like terms.
EXERCISE 21b Simplify the following expressions:
6x + 3(x —2)
6x + 3(x—2) = 6x + 3x —6
= 9x-6
2 + (3x-7)
2 + (3x-7) (This means 2+ l(3x —7))
= 2 + 3X-7
= 3x-5
309
Simplify the following expressions:
1. 2x T 4(x T 1) 1 -
3x + 3(x-5)
2. 3 + 5(2x + 3) 7. 2(x+4) + 3(x + 5)
3. 3(x+l) + 4 1 -
6(2x-3) + 5(x-l)
4. 6(2x — 3) + 2x 9; 3x + (2x + 5)
5. 7 + 2(2x + 5) 10. 4+(3x-l)
4x: —2(x + 3)
(In the expression 4x —2(x + 3) we see that we are required

to take away 2 x’s and 2 threes (which is 6).)
4x —2(x + 3) = 4x —2x —6
= 2x—6
5-(x + 4)
5-(x + 4) = 5~x~4
= 1 —X
11. 3x-2(3x + 4) 16. 7a—(fl+6)
12. 5-4(5 + x) 17. 10-4(3x + 2)
13. 7c-(c + 2) 18. 40-2(1+ 5w)
14. 5x —4(2+x) 1^ 6y-3(3y + 4)
15. 9-2(4x+l) 20. 8-3(2 + 5z)
MULTIPLICATION OF DIRECTED NUMBERS
Consider the expression 6x —(x —3).

From 6x we have to subtract the number in the bracket which is
3 less than x.
If we start by writing 6x —x we have subtracted 3 too many.
To put it right we must add on 3.
Therefore 6x —(x —3) = 6x—x+3
Similarly 8x—3(x —2) means
“from 8x subtract three times the number that is 2 less than x”.
If we write 8x—3x we have subtracted too much, by an amount

equal to 3 twos (i.e. 6). So we must add 6 on again giving
8x —3(x —2) = 8x—3x + 6

More Algebra 311
From this, and from the previous exercise, we have
a) (+3)x( + 2) = +6
This is just the multiplication of positive numbers,

i.e. ( + 3)x( + 2) = 3x2 = 6
b) (-3)x( + 2)=-6
Here we could write ( —3)x( + 2) = —3(2).

This is equivalent to subtracting 3 twos, i.e. subtracting 6.
c) ( + 4)x(-3) = -12
This means four lots of —3,

i.e. (-3) + (-3) + (-3) + (-3) = -12
d) (-2)x(-3)=+6
This can be thought of as taking away two lots of —3,

i.e. -2(-3) = -(-6)
We have already seen that taking away a negative number is
equivalent to adding a positive number, so ( —2) x ( —3)= +6.
EXERCISE 21c
Calculate a)( + 2)x( + 4) b)2x4.
a) ( + 2)x( + 4) = 8
b) 2x4 = 8
Calculate a) (—3) x ( + 4) b)—3x4.
a) (-3)x( + 4) = -12
b) -3x4 = -12
Calculate a)( + 4)x( —3) b)4x(—3).
a) ( + 4)x(-3) = -12
b) 4x(-3) = -12
Calculate a)( —5)x( —2) b) -5(—2).
a) (-5)x(-2) = 10
b) -5(-2) = 10
Calculate;
1. (-3)x( + 5) 5. (+6)x(-7) 9; ( + 5)x(-l)
2. ( + 4)x(-2) 6. (-4)x(-3) 10; (-6)x(-3)
3. (-7)x(-2) 7. (-6)x(+3) 11. (-3)x(-9)

4. ( + 4)x(+l) 8. (-8)x(-2) 12. (-2)x( + 8)
13. 7x(-5) 17. -6(4) 21; 3(-2)
14. -6(-4) 18. -2(-4) 22. 5x3
15. -3x5 19. -(-3) 23. 6x(-3)
16. 5x(-9) 20. 4x(-2) -5(-4)
25. 6 x ( —4) 27. (+5)x( + 9) 7(-4)
26. -3( + 8) 28. -4x5 (-4)x(-9)
EXERCISE 21 d Multiply out the following brackets:
-4(3x-4)
-4(3x-4)= --12x+16 ^
-{x + 2)
(—(;r + 2) means -l(x + 2))
-ix + 2) = — x—2
1. — 6{x — 5) 6. -7(x + 4)
2. -5(3c + 3) 7. -'i{2d-2)
3. -2(5e-3)
1- -2(4 + 2x)
4. -(3x-4) 9.
1
I
00
5. 10;
cn
1
I
More Algebra 313
11. 4(3a: + 9) 1^ -(3x+2)
12. 5(2 + 3jc) 17. 8(2-3x)
13. \2x-6) 1®; -3(2j;-4x)
14. -7(2 + x) 19. 5(4x-l)
15. -2(3x-l) 20; -5(l-4x)
21. 6(4+5x) 26; 2(3x + 2>;+l)
22. -6(4+5x) 27; -5(5 + 2x)
23. 6(4-5x) 28; A{x-y)
24. 29; -(4c-5)

1
25. -{5a + Sb) 30; 9(2x-l)
1.
os
5x + 4(5x + 3) 1
i
i-
2.
T
42-3(2c+5) r. 1
3. 2m + 4(3/M —5) 8; 10/+3(4-2/)
4. 7-2(3x + 2) 9; 7-2(5-25)
5. x + (5x-4) 10; 7x + 3(4x-l)
11. 7(3x+l)-2(2x + 4) 1£. 6x + 2(3x-7)
12. 5(2x-3)-(x + 3) 17. 20x-4(3 + 4x)
13. 2(4x + 3) + (x — 5) 11; 4(x+l) + 5(x + 3)
14. 7(3 —x) —(6 —2x) 11; 3(2x + 3)-5(x + 6)
15. 5 + 3(4x+l) 12; 5(6x—3) + (x + 4)
21. 4(x— l) + 5(2x + 3) 11; 3x “t“ 2(4x + 2) 3
22. 4(x-l)-5(2x+3) 11- 5-4(2x+3)-7x
23. 4(x-l) + 5(2x-3) 12; 3(x + 6) —(x —3)
24. 4(x-l)-5(2x-3) 12; 3(x + 6)-(x + 3)
25. 8(2x-l)-(x+l) 30. 7x + 8x—2(5x+ 1)

EQUATIONS CONTAINING BRACKETS
If we wish to solve equations containing brackets we first multiply out

the brackets and then collect like terms.
EXERCISE 21f Solve the following equations:
4 + 2(x+l) = 22
4 + 2(x+l) = 22
4 4“ 2x 4" 2 = 22
2jc + 6 = 22
Check: If x = 8, left-hand side = 44-2(84- 1)
= 4-f2x9
= 22
Right-hand side = 22, so x = 8 is the solution.
1. 64-3(x-f4) = 24 1- 28 = 4(3x4-!)
2. 3x4-2 = 2(2x4-1) 7. 44-2(x-1) = 12
3. 5x4-3(x4-l) = 14 1- 7x-l-(x-2) = 22
4. 5(x-f 1) = 20 9; l-4(x-f4) = X
5. 2(x-b5) = 6(x-Hl) 10; 8x-3(2x-f 1) = 7
11. 16 —4(x4-3) = 2x ll- 16-2(2x-3) = lx
12. 5x-2(3x-f 1) = -6 12; 3x —2 = 5 —(x— 1)

13. 4x-2 = l-(2x-l-3) IL- 7x4-x = 4x—(x—1)
14. 4 = 5x-2(x4-4) 19; 3-6(2x-3) = 33
15. 9x-7(x-l) = 0 6x = 2x —(x —4)
21. 3(x4-2)-f4(2x-f 1) = 6x-b20 26; 3-4(2x4-3) = -25

22. 9(2x-1)-I-2(3x4-4) = 20x4-3 27; 15-|-5(x —7) = .V
23. 3(x4-2)-|-4(2x—1) = 5(x —2) 28; 6x —2 —3(x—4) = 13
24. 2(2x4-1)4-4 = 6(3x-6) 29; 6(x-2)-(2x-l) = 2
25. 6x 4-44- 5(x 4- 6) = 12 30. 4(2x-5)-l-6 = 2
More Algebra 315
PROBLEMS TO BE SOLVED BY FORMING EQUATIONS
EXERCISE 21 g Solve the following problems by forming an equation in each case.

Explain, either in words or on a diagram, what your letter stands for
and always end by answering the question asked.
The width of a rectangle is xcm. Its length is 4 cm more

than its width. The perimeter is 48 cm.
What is the width?
(x+4)cm
The width is xcm so the
length is {x + 4) cm.
X cm lx cm
jc+(x: + 4) + x + (x + 4) = 48
4x + 8 = 48
(x + 4) cm
Take 8 from each side 4x = 40
Divide each side by 4 x = 10
Therefore the width is 10 cm.
A choc-ice costs xpence and a cone costs Spence less. One

choc-ice and two cones together cost £1.44 or 144 pence.
How much is a choc-ice?
A choc-ice costs x pence and a cone costs (x —3) pence.
x-l-2(x —3) = 144
x-l-2x —6 = 144
3x-6 = 144
Add 6 to each side 3x = 150
Divide each side by 3 x = 50
Therefore a choc-ice costs 50 pence.
1. I think of a number, double it and add 14. The result is 36.

What is the number?
2. I think of a number and add 6. The result is equal to twice the

“ first number. What is the first number?
3. In triangle ABC, AB = AC.

The perimeter is 24 em.
Find AB.
X
B 6 cm C
4. I think of a number, take away 7 and multiply the result by 3,

giving 15. What is the number?
5; A bun costs xpence and a cake costs Spence more than a bun.
Four cakes and three buns together cost £1.60. How much does
one bun cost?
6. A bus started from the terminus with x passengers. At the first

stop another x passengers got on and 3 got off. At the next
stop, 8 passengers got on. There were then 37 passengers. How
many passengers were there on the bus to start with?
7. Buns cost X pence each and a cask costs twice as much as a bun.
I buy two buns and three cakes and pay £1.60 altogether. How
much does one bun cost?
8; I think of a number, add 6, multiply by 2 and the result is 20.

What is the number?
9; Jane has x pence and Michael has 6 pence less than Jane.
Together they have 30 pence. How much has Jane?
10. The first angle measures x°,

the second angle (going
clockwise) is twice the first,
the third is 30° and the
fourth is 90°. Find the first
angle.
11. 30 sweets are divided amongst Anne, Mary and John. Anne has
X sweets, Mary has three times as many as Anne, and John
has 6. How many sweets has Anne?
11; In triangle ABC, X = v:°,^^ = 70° and £ is 20° more than X.

Draw a diagram and find A.
13. I think of a number, x, and take away 4. Then I start again

with X, double it and subtract 8. The two results are the same.
What is the number?
More Algebra 317
INDICES
We have already seen that the shorthand way of writing 2 x 2 x 2 x 2

is 2^. In the same way we can write xxxy.xxx asx'^. The 4 is
called the index.
EXERCISE 21h Write the following expressions in index form:
yxyxy
yxyxy = /
1. zxzxz 3. bxbxbxbxb sxsxs
2. ax a 4. yxyxyxyxy 6. zxzxzxzxzxz
Give the meanings of the following expressions:
z^
z^ = zxz
7. 9. b'^ 21; X®
8. 10. 12.
2xx:xyxxx3
(Write the numbers first, then the letters in alphabetical

order.)
2xxxyxxx3 =2x3xxxxxy
= 6xV
13. Ixa 15. 3 X fl X 4 17. 3xzxxx5xz

14. 4 x jc xx 16. axaxb Sxaxbxbxa
11;
Give the meanings of the following expressions:
Aab^c
Aab^c = Axaxbxbxc
19. 3z2 21. Azy^ 23; 2x^
20. 2abc 22. 6a^b 24. 3a‘^b^

25. 3x X 2z 28; 3a X 2a X fl
26. X X 6x^ 29. axbxcxla
27. 4a^ X 3 30. 4x X 3 j X 2x
31. ZXZXZXz 37; yxzxyxz
32. 2z X 3z 38; 2x X 5z X y
33. 4x^ X 6 axaxaxaxaxaxa
34. 2 x4 XX X 2 4x^ X 2x^
35. 4s^ xs 41. X xy X z X a
36. xx‘^ 42. S4 XS3
MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION OF ALGEBRAIC FRACTIONS
Algebraic fractions can be multiplied and simplified in the same way

as arithmetic fractions.
EXERCISE 21i Simplify the following fractions:
24 10 , 2z 6
a) y X y »' y X
16 . , 2z 6 2 x/ /
'^3 /if Xxz
“’a" ^3“^
a
5 12 a 6b 3c c
1. -X— 5. -X— —X-
6 5 4 5 i- 5 6
11 18 2c 10 4z 9
2. -X— 6. -X— 10. -X -
9 5 5 3c 3 2z
2 15 P 9 5x X
3. 7. - X- IL
3 ^16 3 p T^To
z z
4. -X- 8. Ixl H; Ix^^
y 14
3 2 6 4
r r 16a 4a6
21. 27.
- X -
4 6 ~yîy
4v 15z yz vx
22. — X- - X —
— 3 xy zv
3b . 9a^> 3a^ 2y^

23; 29;
y ■ 14
- X-
4y 6a
ab c 3 _ 6
24. - X - 30.
— be a — X ■ y
4 16 10a 14
25; 31; - X-
X ' 7 Sab
3s 6s 3x _ 9y
26; 32;
y^y Y^~4
MIXED EXERCISES -
EXERCISE 21j 1. Solve the equation 2x — 3 = 7.
2. Simplify A(x — 3) + 1.
3. I think of a number, double it, add 6 and the result is 32. Find
the number.
4. Solve the equation 3x + \ = 2x—3.
5. What is the meaning of 4fl^?
6. Solve the equation 4x — 5 = 2 — 2x.
7. Simplify 3jc + 2 —x —3.
8. Solve the equation 5 —2x = 5.
EXERCISE 21k 1. Solve the equation 5x + 6 = 3—x.
2. Simplify 4x —3(2x —5).
3. 1 think of a number, double it, subtract 10 and my answer is

2 more than the number I first thought of. What was the number?
4. Simplify 3ax5bx4c.
5. Solve the equation 4(x + 3) = 3(2x —4).
2x
6. Simplify -X-.
7. Simplify 2x+6_v —4x + 7x.
8. Solve the equation 2x — (x + 3) = 0.
EXERCISE 211 1. Solve the equation 4—2x = 6 —3x.
2. Simplify xa^.
3. Andrew has 6 sweets, Mary has x sweets and Jim has twice as
many as Andrew. Together they have four times as many as
Mary has. Form an equation and find how many sweets Mary
has.
4. Solve the equation 3x-4 + 8 + x = 2x + 3 —5.
5. Simplify 3 —(x—1).
6. Simplify — x—.
5y 3x
More Algebra 321
7. Simplify 3(x-l) + 4(2x + 3)-5(x+1).
8. Simplify 2(x + 3) —4(x —1).
EXERCISE 21m 1. Solve the equation 3x + 7 = x+1.
Ax 5x
2. Simplify
Tr'^22'
3. Solve the equation 4 —2x = 6 —4x.

4. When shopping, Mrs Jones spent £x in the first shop, the same
amount in the second shop, £2 in the third and £8 in the last.
The total amount she spent was £18. Form an equation. How
much did she spend in the first shop?
5. What is the meaning of x^?
6. Simplify x—1 —5 + 4x —x.

7. Simplify 4 —(x—1).
8. There is no solution of the equation 4x + 3 + 2x = 6x. Find the

reason by trying to solve the equation.
STATISTICS
COLLECTING INFORMATION
Statistics is the subject that tries to make sense of large eollections of

information in the form of numbers. The number of items of
information can run into millions as, for instance, when the ages of
everyone in the U.K. are being considered. To learn how to handle
such very large collections, we start with smaller ones.
We must start by collecting some information.
EXERCISE 22a Copy this form on to a card and then fill it in with the information
asked for.
1. Name .
2. Date of birth: Day. Month. Year
3. Height (cm) .
4. Shoe size (continental) .
5. Hand span (cm) .
6. Number of brothers and sisters.
7. Favourite eolour: ring one of these
red blue green yellow pink purple black white
Pets that you have at home:

ring one or more of these
cat dog hamster mouse gerbil
fish rabbit other none
A DATABASE
The completed cards for the whole class can now be colleeted together.
This collection of cards is a database.
If we want to work on one set of information, we can go through the

database and write down each item from the set. For example we can
extract the number of brothers and sisters of each member of the class.
322
Statistics 323
MAKING A FREQUENCY TABLE
This is a list of the number of brothers and sisters of the thirty pupils
in a class. Each figure represents the number of brothers and sisters of
one member of the class.
0 1 1 3 0 12 10 1
1 3 1 0 1 2 3 110
1 0 2 0 1 112 4 1
To make sense of the numbers that we have collected we need to put

them into order. One way of doing this is to make a frequency table.
The frequency tells us how many of each type of item there are.
There are five different items in our list: 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4.
We start by making a table like the one below. Then we work down
the columns in the list, making a tally mark, /, in the tally column
next to the appropriate item.
(To make it easier to count up afterwards we can group the tally

marks into fives, like this: // , or like this:IS// .)
Number of
brothers
and sisters Tally Frequency
0 m
1 m ff
2 n
3 //
Total
Next we count up the tally marks and write the total in the frequency
column.
Lastly, we total the frequency column to check that the total number
of items recorded in the table is the same as the number of items in
the list.
EXERCISE 22b 1. The table above is incomplete; copy it without the tally marks.
Now make the tally marks afresh from the original information
and complete the table.
2. A box contains bags of crisps. Some are plain salted (S), some are
salt and vinegar (V), some are cheese and onion (C) and some are
prawn cocktail (P). The bags are taken out of the box one at a
time and the flavour of each bag is written down in a list.
p s s V c s p P s
s p V s c c p V s
p s V c c C V P V
V s s c s S P s s
Make a frequency table for this list like the one on page 323.
3. This is a list of the favourite colours of some children, chosen

from red (R), green (G), blue (B), yellow (Y) and pink
R R P Y R Y P G R B R
P Y Y R B Y R R R Y Y
R Y B G Y R P P R R Y
Y R R R p Y Y B Y G R
Make a frequency table for this list.
This is a list of the shoe sizes of a group of children.
26 25 27 25 23 26 24 24 27 24 25
24 23 25 24 24 23 26 23 24 25 25
23 24 25 25 24 23 24 26 25 24 23
22 24 23 27 23 25 24 24 25 23 24
Make a frequency table for this list.
5. Use the class database that was made in Exercise 22a for this
question.
a) Make a list of the month of birth of each member of the class,

and then make a frequency table for the list.
b) Make a list of the number of brothers and sisters of each

member of the class and then make a frequency table for the
list.
MAKING A BAR CHART
A bar chart shows frequencies very clearly.
This bar chart uses the frequency table in Question 1 of Exercise 22b
and shows the frequencies of the numbers of brothers and sisters of the
pupils in a class.
Statistics 325
Notice that the vertical axis is used for frequency. The different kinds
of item are on the horizontal axis.
Notice also that the bars are all the same width. It does not matter
what width you choose to make the bars, provided that all bars are
the same width. In this diagram there is a space between the bars, but
the bars can touch if we want them to.
EXERCISE 22c 1. Peter and Rachel did a survey of the types of vehicle passing the
school gate one lunch hour and produced the following frequency
table.
Type of vehicle Bicycle Motorbike Car Lorry
Frequency 4 10 25 16
a) How many vehicles passed the school gate altogether?
b) Which was the most common type of vehicle?
c) Draw a bar chart to show the information.
2. This frequency table shows the results of a survey on children’s

opinions about the quality of school dinners.
Opinion Very good Good Satisfactory Poor Very poor
Frequency 2 12 20 10 8
a) How many people were asked their opinion on school

dinners?
b) Draw a bar chart to show the information.
3. Use the frequency table that you made for Question 2 of

Exercise 22b for this question.
a) Which is the most common type of crisp in the box?

b) Draw a bar chart to show the information.
4. Use the frequency table that you made for Questions of

Exercise 22b for this question.
a) Which was the most commonly chosen colour?
b) Draw a bar chart to show the information in the frequency

table.
USING BAR CHARTS
Bar charts can come in other forms. Sometimes the bars are lines.
Sometimes the bars are horizontal.
When you look at a bar chart to find information from it, always read
the labels on the axes carefully.
EXERCISE 22d1. Pets owned by members o'" class 3D.
Pet
Use the bar chart to answer the following questions.

a) What is the most popular pet?
b) How many children have a dog as a pet?
c) What is the total number of pets owned by members of

class 3D?
Statistics 327
2. Marks in a maths test.
01 23456789 10
Mark
a) How many pupils had a mark of 8?
b) What was the lowest mark and how many pupils got it?
c) What was the most common mark?
d) How many pupils had a mark of 7 or more?
3. Favourite subject from the school timetable.
10 I---
History Maths English Art PE French

Subject
a) How many children chose history as their favourite subject?
b) What was the most popular subject?
c) What was the least popular subject?

4. Population in five towns (to the nearest thousand).
Faversham
Castle Hill
§ Brotton
o
Backley
I
Berkhampton
1 -1-^-1-
C) 5000 10000 15 000 20000
Population
a) Which town has the largest population?
b) What is the population of Backley?
c) Which town has the smallest population?

What is the population of this town?
GROUPING INFORMATION
These are the test marks for a group of pupils. The test was marked
out of 15.
6 4 8 10 6 12 10
5 9 10 14 3 4 9
12 12 8 13 2 9 7
14 12 9 11 15 8 12
There are sixteen possible marks (0 to 15). Some of these do not

appear in the list and others appear only once or twice. A frequency
table listing all the possible marks would not give us a helpful picture
so we make more sense of the marks by grouping them. We have
chosen four groups for this frequency table. (Remember to work down
the columns, making a tally mark in the column next to the
appropriate group.)
Mark Tally Frequency
0-3 // 2
4-7 m/ 6
8-11 mw/ 11
12-15 mm 9
Total 28
Statistics 329
This bar chart illustrates the set of marks.
Mark
£XERCISE 22e1. For an English project pupils were asked to investigate the
number of letters per word from a paragraph of the book Tom’s
Midnight Garden. This is a list of the number of letters per word.
4 3 3 5 3 12 4 6 4 3 9
2 4 4 I 4 6 4 3 6 4 6
3 7 4 1 6 4 5 3 4 3 6
4 3 4 6 6 5 3 3 2 7 3
4 10 11
a) How many words were there in the paragraph?
b) Copy and complete this frequency table.
Number of
letters Tally Frequency
1-3
4-6
7-9
10-12
Total
c) Make a bar chart to illustrate the information in this frequency

table.
2. Investigate the number of letters per word in question 5 on page

330 of this book.
a) Make a list of the number of letters per word.
b) Make a frequency table for this list using the groups 1-3
letters, 4-6 letters, 7-9 letters, 10-12 letters, more than 12
letters.
c) Draw a bar chart to illustrate the information in your
frequency table.
3. This frequency table is based on the journey times of the

employees of Able Engineering Co.
Journey time in minutes 0-14 15-29 30-44 45-59
Number of employees 3 8 6 2
a) How many employees took part in this survey?
b) How many employees had a journey time of less than half an

hour?
c) How many employees had a journey time of quarter of an hour

or more?
d) Is it possible to tell from the table how many had a journey

time of five minutes?
4. A group of ten-year-olds were asked how much pocket money

they were given each week. This frequency table was made from
the information.
Weekly pocket money 0-49 50-99 100-149 150-199 200-249
Number of children 10 15 42 68 18
a) How many children were asked how much pocket money they
received?
b) How many children received more than 99 p each week?
c) How many children did not receive any pocket money?
5. Make your own survey of the pocket money given to your friends
and classmates.
a) Start by preparing a frequency table like the one in Question 4,

but leave the numbers of children blank. You may have to add
further groups, i.e. 250-299, and so on.
b) Ask between thirty and fifty children how much pocket money
they get each week and put a tally mark in the appropriate
column each time you are told an amount.
c) Illustrate your survey with a bar chart.

Statistics 331
6. This bar chart illustrates a survey into the number of books (not
counting school books) read each week by some sixteen-year-olds.
___
_1 r- 1
0-1 2-3 4-5 6-7
Number of books
a) How many read less than two books each week?
b) How many read four or more books each week?
c) Why is it not possible to tell how many read four books each
week?
READING BAR CHARTS
Bar charts can be used for information other than frequencies. When
you look at a bar chart, read the labels on the axes.
The bars are usually vertical but can be horizontal.
EXERCISE 22f 1. This bar chart gives rough guide-lines on the distances that should
be allowed between moving cars.
At 30 mph 3 car lengths
a) Roughly how far should a car travelling at 70 mph keep from

the car in front?
b) What rule has been used to decide the safe distance?
c) Write two sentences on why this rule is only a rough guide.

2. Cost of fuel in an average home with central heating:
Appliances Cooking Hot water Central heating

Off peak electric heating and
hot water: electric cooking
Solid fuel central heating and

hot water; electric cooking
Gas central heating and hot

water; gas cooking
No numbers are given but we can get an idea about the relative
costs.
a) Which is the most expensive method overall?
b) Which is the cheapest?
c) Which is the most expensive method of producing hot water?
d) Which is the cheapest method of cooking?
3. Bar chart showing the average daily hours of sunshine in

Aberdeen and Margate:
a) Is there more sunshine in Margate or in Aberdeen?
b) Which month is the finest in both towns?
c) Which month has the least sunshine in each town?

Statistics 333
PIE CHARTS
A pie chart is used to represent information when some quantity is

shared out and divided into different categories.
Here is a pie chart to show the proportions, within a group, of people

with eyes of certain colours.
22
The size of the “pie slice” represents the size of the group. We can see
without looking at the numbers that there are about the same number
of people with brown eyes as with grey eyes and that there are about
twice as many with grey eyes as with blue. The size of the pie slice is
given by the size of the angle at the centre, so to draw a pie chart we
need to calculate the sizes of the angles.
The number of people is 60.
As there are 12 blue-eyed people, they form ^ of the whole group and
are therefore represented by that fraction of the circle.
Blue; ^ X ^ =72° Grey:

1
6 360"
Hazel: — x — = 36 Brown:
m
i
1
Total 360°
Now draw a circle of radius about 5 cm (or

whatever is suitable). Draw one radius as
shown and complete the diagram using a
protractor, turning your page into the
easiest position for drawing each new
angle.
Label each “slice”.
EXERCISE 22g Draw pie charts to represent the following information, first working
out the angles.
1. A box of 60 coloured balloons contains the following numbers of

balloons of each colour:
Colour Red Yellow Green Blue White
Number of
balloons 16 22 10 7 5
2. Ninety people were asked how they travelled to work and the
following information was recorded;
Transport Car Bus Train Motorcycle Bicycle
Number of
people 32 38 12 6 2
3. On a cornflakes packet the composition of 120 g of cornflakes is

given in grams as follows:
Protein Fat Carbohydrate Other ingredients
101 1 10 8
4. Of 90 cars passing a survey point it was recorded that 21 had

two doors, 51 had four doors, 12 had three (two side doors and
a hatchback) and 6 had five doors.
5. A large flower arrangement contained 18 dark red roses, 6 pale

pink roses, 10 white roses and 11 deep pink roses.
6. Use the information given in Question 2 of Exercise 22b.
7. The children in a class were asked what pets they owned and the
following information was recorded;
Small
Animal Dog Cat Bird animal Fish
Statistics 335
Sometimes the total number involved is not as convenient as in the

previous problems. We may have to find an angle correct to the
nearest degree.
If there had been 54 people whose eye colours were recorded we might
have had the following information:
Eye colour Blue Grey Hazel Brown
Frequency 10 19 5 20
Total = 54
20
10 200
Angles Blue; — X
1 3
= 66f°
2o
360° 380
Grey: —x-= —
1 3
= 126f'
= 126f°= 127° (to the nearest degree)
■20
360° 100
1 ~Y
= 33i°
20
360° 400
Brown; — x
.54- 1 3
3
= 133y° = 133° (to the nearest degree)
Total 360°
(If several angles are taken to the nearest degree we do not always get
exactly 360°.)
Draw pie charts to represent the following information, working out

the angles first and, where necessary, giving the angles correct to the
nearest degree.
8. 300 people were asked whether they lived in a flat, a house, a

bedsit, a bungalow or in some other type of accommodation and
the following information was recorded:
Type of
accommodation Flat Ftouse Bedsit Bungalow Other
Frequency 90 150 33 15 12
9. In a street in which 80 people live the numbers in various age

groups are as follows:
Age group 65 and

(years) 0-15 16-21 22-34 35-49 50-64 over
1
Number of people 16 3 19 21 12 ,9
10. A group of people were asked to select their favourite colour

from a card showing 6 colours and the following results were
recorded:
Rose Sky Golden Lime ! Tomato

Colour pink blue yellow Violet green red
Number of people 1
(frequency) 6 8 8 2 I 10
Types of vehiicle mov ing alonj1 a busy road during (jne hour:
Vehicle Cars Vans Lorries Motorcycles Bicycles
Frequency 62 11 15 10 2
12. Hours of sunshine per day during May:
Hours per day 0-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 over 8
Statistics 337
INTERPRETING PIE CHARTS
EXERCISE 22h 1. This pie chart shows the uses of personal computers in 1981:
Key:
_ Home and hobby
_Educational
Scientific
Business and professional
a) For which purpose were computers used most?
b) Estimate the fraction of the total sales used for

i) scientific purposes ii) home and hobbies.
2. The pie chart below shows how fuel is used for different purposes
in the average house:
a) For which purpose is most fuel used?
b) How does the amount of fuel used for cooking compare with
the amount used for hot water?
3. This pie chart shows the age distribution of the population in

years, in 1988:
Over 80
a) Estimate the size of the fraction of the population in the age

groups i) under 10 years ii) 60-79 years.
b) State which groups are of roughly the same size.

PICTOGRAPHS
To attract attention, pictographs are often used on posters and in

newspapers and magazines. The best pictographs give numerical
information as well; the worst give the wrong impression.
EXERCISE 22i 1. Road deaths in the past four years at an accident black spot:
represents
five deaths
a) Give an estimate of the number of deaths in each year.
b) What message is the poster trying to convey?
c) How effective do you think it is?
2. The most popular subject among first year pupils:
represents
5 people
a) Which is the most popular subject?
b) How many pupils chose each subject and how many were
asked altogether?
c) Is this a good way of presenting the information?

Statistics 339
3. Bar chart in an advertisement showing the consumption of Fizz

lemonade;
a) What does this show about the consumption of lemonade?
It was decided to change from a bar chart to a pictograph for the

next advertisement:
b) This looks impressive but it could be misleading. Why?
MEAN AND RANGE
FINDING THE MEAN

We often need to represent a set of numbers by one representative
number called the average, which gives an indication of the middle of
the set.
There are three different averages but the one most commonly used is
the mean.
To find the mean we add up all the values and divide by the number
of values.
Sum of all the values

Mean =
Number of values
EXERCISE 22j
In five tests, Alan received marks of 7, 8, 6, 9 and 4.
What is his mean mark?
Total marks scored = 7+8 + 6 + 9 + 4
= 35
There are 5 marks.

Mean mark = 35 = 5
=7
1. Six pupils got the following marks in a test: 5, 7, 8, 4, 8, 4.

What is the mean mark?
2. In three different shops, the price of a can of cola is 27 p, 25 p

and 23 p. What is the mean price?
3. Five people decided to pool their money. They put in the

following amounts: £10, £5, £6, £7 and £12.
a) How much was in the pool?
b) If the five people had contributed equally to the total, how

much would each have given?
c) What was the mean amount contributed to the pool?
4. The ages of the children in a swimming club are
9, 10, 8, 10, 11, 8, 12, 9, 10, 11, 10, 12
Find the mean age.
5. Find the mean of each set of numbers.
a) 2, 4, 8, 4, 7, 1, 7, 6, 5, 6
b) 12, 15, 13, 10, 24, 16
c) 24, 35, 44, 28, 34
d) 1.2, 3.7, 2.3, 4.1, 1.7
6. The buses that passed the school gate in four hours were
counted. From this information it was found that the average
number of buses per hour was 3. How many buses were
counted?
Statistics 341
The mean is not always a number that ean exist.
Five children gave 2 p, 3 p, 2 p, 4 p and 5 p to a collection.

Find the mean amount given.
Total sum = 16 p
Mean amount = 16 p 5 = 3.2 p
7. The prices of an HB pencil in four different shops are 12 p, 14 p,

13 p and 15 p. Find the mean price.
8. Ten children got the following marks in a test:

8, 9, 7, 8, 5, 8, 6, 8, 4, 9
Find the mean mark.
9. The prices of a 200 g jar of instant coffee in five different shops

were £2.80, £3.66, £2.95, £3.04 and £2.99.
Find the mean price.
10. A traffic survey found that, over a five-hour period, the average
number of cars passing through a set of traffic lights per hour
was 65.8. How many cars were counted?
FINDING THE RANGE
The mean of 1, 25, 5, 12 and 7 is 10.
The mean of 9, 10, 12, 8 and 11 is also 10.
It is clear that to use only the mean to represent each group is not
always enough. We need to show that the first group of numbers is
more widely spread out. We say that the first set covers a greater
range than the second.
The range is the difference

between the greatest and the smallest numbers.
The range of the first group is 25 — 1, i.e. 24,

and the range of the second is 12 — 8, i.e. 4.
342 ST(P) Mathematics iA
EXERCISE 22k 1. The heights of five boys are 120 cm, 135 cm, 141 cm, 160 cm and
148 cm.
What is the range of these heights?
2. The prices of a particular type of ball-point pen in ten different

shops are 27 p, 32 p, 18 p, 25 p, 25 p, 45 p, 19 p, 22 p, 19 p and
27 p.
Find the range of these prices.
3. Find the range of each of the following sets of quantities.
a) 2 p, 14 p, 7 p, 10 p, lip
b) 1.5 kg, 1.1kg, 1.2 kg, 1.4 kg
c) 9 mm, 5 mm, 12 mm, 4 mm, 2 mm
d) £4.20, £3.34, £1.03, 95 p
4. Ten thirteen-year-old boys measured their heights. They were

144 cm, 132 cm, 175 cm, 135 cm, 152 cm, 145 cm, 161cm,
131 cm, 166 cm and 132 cm.
Find a) the range of these heights b) the mean height
5. These are the marks gained in a maths test by a group of pupils.
10, 12, 3, 12, 15, 8, 9, 12, 14, 13, 5, 11, 12, 10, 11, 7, 9, 12, 13, 8
Find a) the range of these marks b) the mean mark
6. A group of adults gave their loose change for a charity

collection. They gave
12 p, 25 p, 15 p, 30 p, 15 p, 45 p, 10 p, 17 p, 23 p, 30 p, 58 p, 19 p
a) Find the range of the amounts given.
b) If each adult had given an equal amount to get the same

total, how much, to the nearest penny, would this have been?
DECISION TREES
SORTING MIXED OBJECTS
The manager of a garden centre found that the customers had mixed up all
his daffodil and tulip bulbs, both of which were of two sizes, standard and
giant.
He decided first to sort the daffodil bulbs from the tulip bulbs.
Then he could sort the standard sizes from the giant sizes for each type of
flower.
By doing the sorting this way, the manager did not have too many choices
to think about all at once.
We can describe his method by using a '"decision tree".
Whenever we have to sort a set of objects which differ in a number of ways it

is usually better to use a system like the one above and to do the sorting in
stages.
343
EXERCISE 23a
Neil dropped his tool box and all his screws got mixed up. He had brass screws
and steel screws, some with Phillips heads and some with slot heads. Design a
decision tree to help him sort out the screws.
(The first sorting could be brass from steel or Phillips heads from slot heads. We
have decided to sort brass from steel first.)
1. Neil could have decided to start sorting out his screws by first
separating the slot heads from the Phillips heads. Draw the decision
tree showing how to sort the screws this way.
2. Jane wants to organise her box of mixed buttons. There are large ones,
small ones, some with two holes and some with four holes. Draw a
decision tree which shows how Jane can do the sorting,
a) if she starts by separating large from small buttons,
b) if she starts by separating two-hole buttons from four-hole ones.
3. In a cutlery drawer there is a mixture of stainless steel and silver-plated

knives and forks. The cutlery can be sorted in two ways.
a) Give the two different ways of starting.
b) Draw a decision tree for each method.

Decision Trees 345
Sometimes there is more sorting to do.
One afternoon Stewart wanted to find out how many red, green or silver cars
passed his house. For each car that was one of these colours he noted the colour
and also whether the car was a saloon or an estate. Show how he could sort out
his list by drawing a decision tree.
4. Sally has a drawer full of cassettes, some country and western, some
pop and some classical. They are also a mixture of 60s and 90s. Decide
on a good way to sort them out and draw the decision tree.
5. A delivery of fish has just arrived at “Underwater World” and the

dilferent fish have to be sorted into the correct tanks. There are
goldfish, orfe and rudd, and the fish that are 3 to 4 inches long must be
separated from the ones that are 5 to 6 inches long.
a) How many tanks are needed?
b) Write down a suitable label for each tank, e.g. 3-4 inch rudd.
c) Design a decision tree to plan the sorting.
A decision tree can “grow” if further sorting is needed. In the worked

example on page 344, for instance, Neil might also want to separate long
screws from short ones.
If he did, a third question - “Are they long?” - would be asked at the end of
each of the four “branches” in the decision tree. There would then be eight
piles of sorted screws.
A second-hand book trader has to sort out a box of assorted books. He decided to
separate hardbacks from paperbacks, novels from non-fiction and books in good
condition from the poor quality ones. Draw a decision tree to show how the
sorting might be done.
Decision Trees 347
6. Mrs Brown is tidying her kitchen cupboard which contains both large
and small sizes of tins and bottles of fruit and vegetables. She wants to
separate all of these types. Design a decision tree to help with the
sorting.
7. A carpet salesman wants to sort his samples so that he separates Wilton

from Axminster, plain from patterned and top quality from standard.
a) Draw a suitable decision tree.
b) How many separate piles of samples will he have?
8. All the first-year pupils in Rentworth School are being separated into
groups. Their teacher is separating boys from girls, and those whose
age is under 12 from those whose are 12 and over. She also sorts out
those who are wearing school uniform from those who are not.
a) How many groups of pupils will there be after all the sorting is
finished?
b) Draw two decision trees which show how the sorting can be done if
the teacher insists on first dividing girls from boys.
c) Do we end up with the same groups in each tree?

STP Mathematics 1A Text

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

STP Mathematics 1A Text

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

STP Mathematics 1A Text

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ST(P) Mathematics lA

ST(P) 5A (with answers)

ST(P) Resource Book

Stanley Thornes (Publishers) Ltd

The right of L. Bostock, S. Chandler, A. Shepherd and E. Smith to be identified as

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in

First published in 1984 by:

Reprinted in 2002 by:

ISBN 0 7487 0540 6

Page make-up by Cotswold Typesetting Ltd

Printed and bound in Spain by GraphyCems

Chapter 1 Addition and Subtraction of Whole Numbers 1

Chapter 2 Multiplication and Division of Whole Numbers 12

Chapter 3 Fractions: Addition and Subtraction 32

Chapter 4 Fractions: Multiplication and Division 59

Chapter 5 Introduction to Decimals 76

Chapter 6 Multiplication and Division of Decimals 93

Chapter 7 Metric Units 108

Chapter 9 Introducing Geometry 125

Chapter 10 Symmetry 148

Chapter 11 Triangles and Angles 159

Chapter 12 Factors and Indices 181

Chapter 13 Tables and Networks 188

Chapter 14 Area 202

Chapter 15 Parallel Lines and Angles 217

Chapter 16 Coordinates 236

Chapter 18 Introducing Algebra 264

Chapter 19 Volume 279

Chapter 20 Vectors 294

Chapter 21 More Algebra 309

Chapter 22 Statistics 322

Chapter 23 Decision Trees 343

This book attempts to satisfy your mathematical needs as you

All of you need to be able to use a calculator accurately. At this stage

A number of topics have been introduced as a result of the National

The A series of ST(P) Mathematics books aims to prepare pupils to

To add a line of numbers, start at the left-hand side:

EXERCISE la Find the value of:

5. 5+6+4+2 10; 6+7+5+9

11. 2+5+4+1+3 2®; 3+2+3+4+1+5

12. 4+8+2+1+2 17; 4+2+5+6+1+7

13. 6+7+3+5+6 1®; 8+3+9+2+7+3

14. 4+9+2+8+4 1^. 6+9+4+8+7+5

15. 7+3+9+6+8 20. 4+7+8+6+5+2

21. 3 22. 1 23. 4 24. 9 25. 8

26. 3 27. 4 28. 6 29; 7 30. 6

31. 3 32. 5 33. 8 34. 2 35. 4

AnniTiniu of wuni f imiimrfrs

To add a column of numbers, start with the units:

EXERCISE 1b Find the value of the following sums;

6. 101 7. 223 8. 492 9; 259 10. 351

11. 87 12. 93 13. 3021 14; 9217 15. 6943

16. 28 + 72+12 21. 24 + 83 + 76

17. 56+10 + 92 22. 92 + 58 + 27

18. 83+ 107 + 52 23; 52+112 + 38

19. 256+ 139 + 402 24. 207 + 394 + 651

20. 1026 + 398 + 542 25. 943 + 856 + 984

26. 826 + 907 + 329 31. 694 + 706 + 293